The URL can be used to link to this page

BCG LL Restroom RenovationsVILLAGE OF OAK BROOK CONTRACT FOR BUTLER GOVERNMENT CENTER LOWER LEVEL RESTROOM RENOVATIONS PROJECT VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK CONTRACT FOR BUTLER GOVERNMENT CENTER LOWER LEVEL RESTROOM RENOVATIONS PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS Paye ARTICLEI: THE WORK......................................................................................................1 1.1 Performance of the Work...........................................................................................1 1.2 Commencement and Completion Dates.....................................................................2 1.3 Required Submittals................................................................................................... 2 A. Submittals Required...................................................................................................2 B. Number and Format.................................................................................................... 2 C. Time of Submission and Owner's Review................................................................. 2 D. Responsibility for Delay.............................................................................................3 1.4 Review and Interpretation of Contract Provisions..................................................... 3 1.5 Conditions at the Work Site; Record Drawings......................................................... 3 1.6 Technical Ability to Perform......................................................................................4 1.7 Financial Ability to Perform.......................................................................................4 1.8 Time............................................................................................................................4 1.9 Safety at the Work Site...............................................................................................4 1.10 Cleanliness of the Work Site and Environs................................................................5 1.11 Damage to the Work, the Work Site, and Other Property..........................................5 1.12 Subcontractors and Suppliers..................................................................................... 5 A. Approval and Use of Subcontractors and Suppliers ................................................... 5 B. Removal of Subcontractors and Suppliers.................................................................6 1.13 Simultaneous Work By Others...................................................................................6 1.14 Occupancy Prior to Final Payment............................................................................. 6 1.15 Owner's Right to Terminate or Suspend Work for Convenience .............................. 6 A. Termination or Suspension for Convenience............................................................. 6 B. Payment for Completed Work....................................................................................6 ARTICLE II: CHANGES AND DELAYS.............................................................................7 _1_ 2.1 Changes......................................................................................................................7 2.2 Delays.........................................................................................................................7 A. Extensions for Unavoidable Delays........................................................................... 7 B. No Compensation for Delays.....................................................................................7 ARTICLE III: CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR DEFECTIVE WORK....... 7 3.1 Inspection; Testing; Correction of Defects................................................................. 7 A. Inspection................................................................................................................... 7 B. Re-Inspection..............................................................................................................7 C. Correction................................................................................................................... 8 3.2 Warranty of Work....................................................................................................... 8 A. Scope of Warranty......................................................................................................8 B. Repairs; Extension of Warranty................................................................................. 8 C. Subcontractor and Supplier Warranties......................................................................8 3.3 Owner's Right to Correct........................................................................................... 8 ARTICLE IV: FINANCIAL ASSURANCES........................................................................9 4.1 Bonds.......................................................................................................................... 9 4.2 Insurance..................................................................................................................... 9 4.3 Indemnification........................................................................................................... 9 ARTICLEV: PAYMENT....................................................................................................... 9 5.1 Contract Price............................................................................................................. 9 5.2 Taxes and Benefits..................................................................................................... 9 5.3 Progress Payments....................................................................................................10 A. Payment in Installments...........................................................................................10 B. Pay Requests.............................................................................................................10 C. Work Entire..............................................................................................................10 5.4 Final Acceptance and Final Payment.......................................................................10 A. Notice of Completion...............................................................................................10 B. Punch List and Final Acceptance.............................................................................10 C. Final Payment...........................................................................................................10 5.5 Liens.........................................................................................................................11 A. Title...........................................................................................................................11 B. Waivers of Lien........................................................................................................11 C. Removal of Liens.....................................................................................................11 D. Protection of Owner Only........................................................................................11 5.6 Deductions................................................................................................................11 A. Owner's Right to Withhold......................................................................................11 B. Use of Withheld Funds.............................................................................................12 ARTICLE VI: DISPUTES AND REMEDIES .....................................................................12 6.1 Dispute Resolution Procedure..................................................................................12 A. Notice of Disputes and Objections...........................................................................12 B. Negotiation of Disputes and Objections...................................................................12 6.2 Contractor's Remedies.............................................................................................13 6.3 Owner's Remedies....................................................................................................13 6.4 Owner's Additional Remedy for Delay....................................................................14 6.5 Terminations and Suspensions Deemed for Convenience.......................................14 ARTICLE VII: LEGAL RELATIONSHIPS AND REQUIREMENTS ...........................14 7.1 Binding Effect..........................................................................................................14 7.2 Relationship of the Parties........................................................................................15 7.3 No Collusion/Prohibited lnterests............................................................................15 7.4 Assignment...............................................................................................................15 7.5 Confidential Information..........................................................................................15 7.6 No Waiver................................................................................................................ 16 7.7 No Third Party Beneficiaries....................................................................................16 7.8 Notices......................................................................................................................16 7.9 Governing Laws.......................................................................................................17 7.10 Changes in Laws....................................................................................................... 17 7.11 Compliance with Laws.............................................................................................17 A. Compliance Required...............................................................................................17 B. Liability for Fines, Penalties.....................................................................................17 C. Prevailing Wage Act.................................................................................................17 D. Required Provisions Deemed Inserted.....................................................................18 7.12 Compliance with Patents..........................................................................................18 A. Assumption of Costs, Royalties, and Fees...............................................................18 B. Effect of Contractor Being Enjoined........................................................................18 7.13 Time..........................................................................................................................18 7.14 Severability...............................................................................................................19 7.15 Entire Agreement......................................................................................................19 7.16 Amendments.............................................................................................................19 Contractor's Certification Attachment A: Supplemental Schedule of Contract Terms Attachment B: Specifications Attachment C: List of Drawings Attachment D: Special Project Requirements Appendix 1: Prevailing Wages Appendix 2: Form of Performance Bond Appendix 3: Form of Labor and Materials Bond -iv- VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK CONTRACT FOR BUTLER GOVERNMENT CENTER LOWER LEVEL RESTROOM RENOVATIONS PROJECT In consideration of the mutual promises set forth below, the Village of Oak Brook, 1200 Oak Brook Road, Oak Brook, Illinois, 60523, an Illinois municipal corporation ("Owner"), and Bee Liner Lean Services 4444 Oak Park Avenue Oak Lawn Illinois 60453 a Corporation ("Contractor"), make this Contract as of 2017 (the "Effective Date") and hereby agree as follows: ARTICLE I: THE WORK 1.1 Performance of the Work Contractor, at its sole cost and expense, must provide, perform, and complete all of the following, all of which is herein referred to as the "Work": 1. Labor, Equipment, Materials, and Supplies. Provide, perform, and complete, in the manner described and specified in this Contract, all necessary work, labor, services, transportation, equipment, materials, apparatus, machinery, tools, fuels, gas, electric, water, waste disposal, information, data, and other means and items necessary to accomplish the Project at the Work Site, both as defined in Attachment A, in accordance with the specifications attached hereto as Attachment B, the drawings identified in the list attached hereto as Attachment C, and the Special Project Requirements attached hereto as Attachment D. 2. Permits. Except as otherwise provided in Attachment A, procure and furnish all permits, licenses, and other governmental approvals and authorizations necessary in connection therewith. 3. Bonds and Insurance. Procure and furnish all Bonds and all certificates of insurance specified in this Contract. 4. Taxes. Pay all applicable federal, state, and local taxes. 5. Miscellaneous. Do all other things required of Contractor by this Contract, including without limitation arranging for utility and other services needed for the Work and for testing, including the installation of temporary utility lines, wiring, switches, fixtures, hoses, connections, and meters, and providing sufficient sanitary conveniences and shelters to accommodate all workers and all personnel of Owner engaged in the Work. -1- CONTRACT b. Quality. Provide, perform, and complete all of the foregoing in a proper and workmanlike manner, consistent with the highest standards of professional and construction practices and in full compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to, this Contract, and with the greatest economy, efficiency, and expedition consistent therewith, with only new, undamaged and first quality equipment, materials, and supplies. 1.2 Commencement and Completion Dates Contractor must commence the Work not later than the "Commencement Date" set forth on Attachment A and must diligently and continuously prosecute the Work at such a rate as will allow the Work to be fully provided, performed, and completed in full compliance with this Contract not later than the "Completion Date" set forth in Attachment A. The time of commencement, rate of progress, and time of completion are referred to in this Contract as the "Contract Time." 1.3 Required Submittals A. Submittals Required. Contractor must submit to Owner all documents, data, and information specifically required to be submitted by Contractor under this Contract and must, in addition, submit to Owner all such drawings, specifications, descriptive information, and engineering documents, data, and information as may be required, or as may be requested by Owner, to show the details of the Work, including a complete description of all equipment, materials, and supplies to be provided under this Contract ("Required Submittals"'). Such details must include, but are not limited to, design data, structural and operating features, principal dimensions, space required or provided, clearances required or provided, type and brand of finish, and all similar matters, for all components of the Work. B. Number and Format. Contractor must provide three complete sets for each Required Submittal. All Required Submittals must be prepared on white 8-1/2"xl 1" paper. C. Time of Submission and Owner's Review. All Required Submittals must be provided to Owner no later than the time, if any, specified in this Contract for their submission or, if no time for submission is specified, in sufficient time, in Owner's sole opinion, to permit Owner to review the same prior to the commencement of the part of the Work to which they relate and prior to the purchase of any equipment, materials, or supplies that they describe. Owner will have the right to require such corrections as may be necessary to make such submittals conform to this Contract. All such submittals will, after final processing and review with no exception noted by Owner, become a part of this Contract. No Work related to any submittal may be performed by Contractor until Owner has completed review of such submittal with no exception noted. Owner's review and stamping of any Required Submittal will be for the sole purpose of examining the general management, design, and details of the proposed Work, does not relieve Contractor of the entire responsibility for the performance of the Work in full compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to this Contract, and may not be regarded as any assumption of risk or liability by Owner. !yAS CONTRACT D. Responsibility for Delay. Contractor is responsible for any delay in the Work due to delay in providing Required Submittals conforming to this Contract. 1.4 Review and Interpretation of Contract Provisions Contractor represents and warrants that it has carefully reviewed this Contract, including all of its Attachments, and the drawings identified in Attachment C, all of which are by this reference incorporated into and made a part of this Contract. Contractor must, at no increase in the Contract Price, provide workmanship, equipment, materials, and supplies that fully conform to this Contract. Whenever any equipment, materials or supplies are specified or described in this Contract by using the name or other identifying feature of a proprietary product or the name or other identifying feature of a particular manufacturer or vendor, the specific item mentioned is understood as establishing the type, function and quality desired. Other manufacturers' or vendors' products may be accepted, provided that the products proposed are equivalent in substance and function to those named as determined by Owner in its sole and absolute discretion. Contractor must promptly notify Owner of any discrepancy, error, omission, ambiguity, or conflict among any of the provisions of this Contract before proceeding with any Work affected thereby. If Contractor fails to give such notice to Owner, then the subsequent decision of Owner as to which provision of this Contract governs is final, and any corrective work required does not entitle Contractor to any damages, to any compensation in excess of the Contract Price, or to any delay or extension of the Contract Time. When the equipment, materials, or supplies furnished by Contractor cannot be installed as specified in this Contract, Contractor must, without any increase in the Contract Price, make all modifications required to properly install the equipment, materials, or supplies. Any such modification is subject to the prior review and consent of Owner. 1.5 Conditions at the Work Site• Record Drawings Contractor represents and warrants that it has had a sufficient opportunity to conduct a thorough investigation of the Work Site and the surrounding area and has completed such investigation to its satisfaction. Contractor will have no claim for damages, for compensation in excess of the Contract Price, or for a delay or extension of the Contract Time based upon conditions found at, or in the vicinity of, the Work Site. When information pertaining to subsurface, underground or other concealed conditions, soils analysis, borings, test pits, utility locations or conditions, buried structures, condition of existing structures, and other investigations is or has been provided by Owner, or is or has been otherwise made available to Contractor by Owner, such information is or has been provided or made available solely for the convenience of Contractor and is not part of this Contract. Owner assumes no responsibility whatever in respect to the sufficiency or accuracy of such information, and there is no guaranty or warranty, either expressed or implied, that the conditions indicated are representative of those existing throughout the Work or the Work Site, or that the conditions indicated are representative of those existing at any particular location, or that the conditions indicated may not change, or that unanticipated conditions may not be present. -3- CONTRACT Contractor is solely responsible for locating all existing underground installations by prospecting no later than two workdays prior to any scheduled excavation or trenching, whichever is earlier. Contractor must check all dimensions, elevations, and quantities indicated in this Contract within the same time period as set forth above for prospecting underground installations. Contractor must lay out the Work in accordance with this Contract and must establish and maintain such locations, lines and levels. Wherever pre-existing work is encountered, Contractor must verify and be responsible for dimensions and location of such pre- existing work. Contractor must notify Owner of any discrepancy between the dimensions, elevations and quantities indicated in this Contract and the conditions of the Work Site or any other errors, omissions or discrepancies which Contract may discover during such inspections. Full instructions will be famished by Owner should such error, omission, or discrepancy be discovered, and Contractor must carry out such instructions as if originally specified and without any increase in Contract Price. Before Final Acceptance of the Work, Contractor must submit to Owner two sets of Drawings of Record, unless a greater number is specified elsewhere in this Contract, indicating all field deviations from Attachment B or the drawings identified in Attachment C. 1.6 Technical Ability to Perform Contractor represents and warrants that it is sufficiently experienced and competent, and has the necessary capital, facilities, plant, organization, and staff, to provide, perform and complete the Work in full compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to, this Contract. 1.7 Financial Abj!M to Perform Contractor represents and warrants that it is financially solvent, and Contractor has the financial resources necessary to provide, perform and complete the Work in full compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to, this Contract. 1.8 Time Contractor represents and warrants that it is ready, willing, able and prepared to begin the Work on the Commencement Date and that the Contract Time is sufficient time to permit completion of the Work in full compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to, this Contract for the Contract Price, all with due regard to all natural and man-made conditions that may affect the Work or the Work Site and all difficulties, hindrances, and delays that may be incident to the Work. 1.9 Safetv at the Work Site Contractor is solely and completely responsible for providing and maintaining safe conditions at the Work Site, including the safety of all persons and property during performance of the Work. This requirement applies continuously and is not limited to normal working hours. me CONTRACT Contractor must take all safety precautions as necessary to comply with all applicable laws and to prevent injury to persons and damage to property. Contractor must conduct all of its operations without interruption or interference with vehicular and pedestrian traffic on public and private rights-of-way, unless it has obtained permits therefor from the proper authorities. If any public or private right-of-way are rendered unsafe by Contractor's operations, Contractor must make such repairs or provide such temporary ways or guards as are acceptable to the proper authorities. 1.10 Cleanliness of the Work Site and Environs Contractor must keep the Work Site and adjacent areas clean at all times during performance of the Work and must, upon completion of the Work, leave the Work Site and adjacent areas in a clean and orderly condition. 1.11 Damage to the Work, the Work Site and Other Proper The Work and everything pertaining thereto is provided, performed, completed, and maintained at the sole risk and cost of Contractor from the Commencement Date until Final Payment. Contractor is fully responsible for the protection of all public and private property and all persons. Without limiting the foregoing, Contractor must, at its own cost and expense, provide all permanent and temporary shoring, anchoring and bracing required by the nature of the Work in. order to make all parts absolutely stable and rigid, even when such shoring, anchoring and bracing is not explicitly specified, and support and protect all buildings, bridges, roadways, conduits, wires, water pipes, gas pipes, sewers, pavements, curbs, sidewalks, fixtures and landscaping of all kinds and all other public or private property that may be encountered or endangered in providing, performing and completing the Work. Contractor will have no claim against Owner because of any damage or loss to the Work or to Contractor's equipment, materials, or supplies from any cause whatsoever, including damage or loss due to simultaneous work by others. Contractor must, promptly and without charge to Owner, repair or replace, to the satisfaction of Owner, any damage done to, and any loss suffered by, the Work and any damage done to, and any loss suffered by, the Work Site or other property as a result of the Work. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Contract, Contractor's obligations under this Section exist without regard to, and may not be construed to be waived by, the availability or unavailability of any insurance, either of Owner or Contractor, to indemnify, bold harmless, or reimburse Contractor for the cost of any repair or replacement work required by this Section. 1.12 Subcontractors -and SuRpliers A. Approval and Use of Subcontractors and Su liers. Contractor must perform the Work with its own personnel and under the management, supervision, and control of its own organization unless otherwise approved by Owner in writing. All subcontractors, suppliers, and subcontracts used by Contractor must be acceptable to, and approved in advance by, Owner. Owner's approval of any subcontractor, supplier, and subcontract does not relieve Contractor of full responsibility and liability for the provision, performance, and completion of the Work in full compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to, this Contract. All Work performed -5- CONTRACT under any subcontract is subject to all of the provisions of this Contract in the same manner as if performed by employees of Contractor. Every reference in this Contract to "Contractor" is deemed also to refer to all subcontractors and suppliers of Contractor. Every subcontract must include a provision binding the subcontractor or supplier to all provisions of this Contract. B. Removal of Subcontractors„ and Suppliers. If any subcontractor or supplier fails to perform the part of the Work undertaken by it in a manner satisfactory to Owner, Contractor must immediately upon notice from Owner terminate such subcontractor or supplier. Contractor will have no claim for damages, for compensation in excess of the Contract Price, or for a delay or extension of the Contract Time as a result of any such termination. 1.13 Simultaneous Work By Others Owner has the right to perform or have performed such other work as Owner may desire in, about, or near the Work Site during the performance of the Work by Contractor. Contractor must make every reasonable effort to perform the Work in such manner as to enable both the Work and such other work to be completed without hindrance or interference from each other. Contractor must afford Owner and other contractors reasonable opportunity for the execution of such other work and must properly coordinate the Work with such other work. 1.14 Occupancy Prior to Final -Pay en Owner will have the right, at its election, to occupy, use, or place in service any part of the Work prior to Final Payment. Such occupancy, use, or placement in service must be conducted in such manner as not to damage any of the Work or to unreasonably interfere with the progress of the Work. No such occupancy, use, or placement in service may be construed as an acceptance of any of the Work or a release or satisfaction of Contractor's duty to insure and protect the Work, nor may it, unless conducted in an unreasonable manner, be considered as an interference with Contractor's provision, performance, or completion of the Work. 1.15 Owner's Rip -ht to Terminate or Suspend Work for Convenience A. Termination or Suspension, for Convenience. Owner has the right, for its convenience, to terminate or suspend the Work in whole or in part at any time by written notice to Contractor. Every such notice must state the extent and effective date of such termination or suspension. On such effective date, Contractor must, as and to the extent directed, stop Work under this Contract, cease all placement of further orders or subcontracts, terminate or suspend Work under existing orders and subcontracts, cancel any outstanding orders or subcontracts that may be cancelled, and take any action necessary to protect any property in its possession in which Owner has or may acquire any interest and to dispose of such property in such manner as may be directed by Owner. B. Payment for Completed Work. In the event of any termination pursuant to Subsection 1.15A above, Owner must pay Contractor (1) such direct costs, excluding overhead, as Contractor has paid or incurred for all Work done in compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to, this Contract up to the effective date of termination together with ten percent of such CONTRACT costs for overhead and profit; and (2) such other costs pertaining to the Work, exclusive of overhead and profit, as Contractor may have reasonably and necessarily incurred as the result of such termination. Any such payment may be offset by any prior payment or payments and is subject to Owner's rights to withhold and deduct as provided in this Contract. ARTICLE II: CHANGES AND DELAYS 2.1 Changes Owner has the right, by written order executed by Owner, to make changes in the Contract, the Work, the Work Site, and the Contract Time ("Change Order"). If any Change Order causes an increase or decrease in the amount of the Work, an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Time may be made. All claims by Contractor for an equitable adjustment in either the Contract Price or the Contract Time must be made within two business days following receipt of such Change Order, and may, if not made prior to such time, be conclusively deemed to have been waived. No decrease in the amount of the Work caused by any Change Order will entitle Contractor to make any claim for damages, anticipated profits, or other compensation. 2.2 Delays A. Extensions for Unavoidable Delays. For any delay that may result from causes that could not be avoided or controlled by Contractor, Contractor must, upon timely written application, be entitled to issuance of a Change Order providing for an extension of the Contract Time for a period of time equal. to the delay resulting from such unavoidable cause. No extension of the Contract Time will be allowed for any other delay in completion of the Work. B. No Compensation for Delays. No payment, compensation, damages, or adjustment of any kind, other than the extension of the Contract Time provided in Subsection 2.2A above, may be made to, or claimed by, Contractor because of hindrances or delays from any cause in the commencement, prosecution, or completion of the Work, whether caused by Owner or any other party and whether avoidable or unavoidable. ARTICLE III: CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR DEFECTIVE WORK 3.1 Inspection; Testin • Correction of Defects A. Inspection. Until Final Payment, all parts of the Work are subject to inspection and testing by Owner or its designated representatives. Contractor must furnish, at its own expense, all reasonable access, assistance, and facilities required by Owner for such inspection and testing. B. Re -Inspection. Re -inspection and re -testing of any Work may be ordered by Owner at any time, and, if so ordered, any covered or closed Work must be uncovered or opened by Contractor. If the Work is found to be in full compliance with this Contract, then Owner must -7- CONTRACT pay the cost of uncovering, opening, re -inspecting, or re -testing, as the case may be. If such Work is not in full compliance with this Contract, then Contractor must pay such cost. C. Correction. Until Final Payment, Contractor must, promptly and without charge, repair, correct, or replace all or any part of the Work that is defective, damaged, flawed, or unsuitable or that in any way fails to conform strictly to the requirements of this Contract. 3.2 Warranty of Work A. Scope of Warrant . Contractor warrants that the Work and all of its components will be free from defects and flaws in design, workmanship, and materials; must strictly conform to the requirements of this Contract; and will be fit, sufficient, and suitable for the purposes expressed in, or reasonably inferred from, this Contract. The warranty herein expressed is in addition to any other warranties expressed in this Contract, or expressed or implied by law, which are hereby reserved unto Owner. B. Repairs LExtension of Warranty. Contractor, promptly and without charge, must correct any failure to fulfill the above warranty that may be discovered or develop at any time within one year after Final Payment or such longer period as may be prescribed in Attachment B or Attachment D to this Contract or by law. The above warranty may be extended automatically to cover all repaired and replacement parts and labor provided or performed under such warranty and Contractor's obligation to correct Work may be extended for a period of one year from the date of such repair or replacement. The time period established in this Subsection 3.2B relates only to the specific obligation of Contractor to correct Work and may not be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations that Contractor has under this Contract. C. Subcontractor and Supplier Warranties. Whenever Attachment B or Attachment D requires a subcontractor or supplier to provide a guaranty or warranty, Contractor is solely responsible for obtaining said guaranty or warranty in form satisfactory to Owner and assigning said warranty or guaranty to Owner. Acceptance of any assigned warranties or guaranties by Owner is a precondition to Final Payment and does not relieve Contractor of any of its guaranty or warranty obligations under this Contract. 3.3 Owner's Right to Correct If, within two business days after Owner gives Contractor notice of any defect, damage, flaw, unsuitability, nonconformity, or failure to meet warranty subject to correction by Contractor pursuant to Section 3.1 or Section 3.2 of this Contract, Contractor neglects to make, or undertake with due diligence to make, the necessary corrections, then Owner is entitled to make, either with its own forces or with contract forces, the corrections and to recover from Contractor all resulting costs, expenses, losses, or damages, including attorneys' fees and administrative expenses. 5.1 ARTICLE IV: FINANCIAL ASSURANCES 4.1 Bonds CONTRACT Contemporaneous with Contractor's execution of this Contract, Contractor must provide a Performance Bond and a Labor and Material Payment Bond, on forms provided by, or otherwise acceptable to, Owner, from a surety company licensed to do business in the State of Illinois with a general rating of A and a financial size category of Class X or better in Best's Insurance Guide, each in the penal sum of the Contract Price ("Bonds"). Contractor, at all times while providing, performing, or completing the Work, including, without limitation, at all times while correcting any failure to meet warranty pursuant to Section 3.2 of this Contract, must maintain and keep in force, at Contractor's expense, the Bonds required hereunder. 4.2 Insurance Contractor hereby agrees and will, at its expense, carry insurance pursuant to the terms, conditions, and coverages set forth in Attachment A. 4.3 Indemnification Contractor hereby agrees to and will indemnify and save harmless Owner and all of it elected officials, officers, employees, attorneys, agents, and representatives against any and all lawsuits, claims, demands, damages, liabilities, losses, and expenses, including attorneys' fees and administrative expenses, that may arise, or be alleged to have arisen, out of or in connection with Contractor's performance of, or failure to perform, the Work or any part thereof, whether or not due or claimed to be due in whole or in part to the active, passive, or concurrent negligence or fault of Contractor, except to the extent caused solely by the negligence of Owner. ARTICLE V: PAYMENT 5.1 Contract Price Owner must pay to Contractor, in accordance with and subject to the terms and conditions set forth in this Article V and Attachment A, and Contractor must accept in full satisfaction for providing, performing, and completing the Work, the amount or amounts set forth in Attachment A (the "Contract Price"), subject to any additions, deductions, or withholdings provided for in this Contract. 5.2 Taxes and Benefits Owner is exempt from and will not be responsible to pay, or reimburse Contractor for, any state or local sales, use, or excise taxes. The Contract Price includes all other applicable federal, state, and local taxes of every kind and nature applicable to the Work as well as all taxes, contributions, and premiums for unemployment insurance, old age or retirement benefits, pensions, annuities, or other similar benefits. All claim or right to claim additional compensation b1 CONTRACT by reason of the payment of any such tax, contribution, or premium is hereby waived and released by Contractor. 5.3 Progress Payments A. PaMent in Installments. The Contract Price must be paid in monthly installments in the manner set forth in Attachment A ("Progress Payments"). B. Pay. Requests. The Village of Oak Brook authorizes the payment of invoices on the second and fourth Tuesday of the month. For consideration on one of these dates, payment request must be received no later than fourteen (14) days prior to the second or fourth Tuesday of the month. Each Pay Request must include (a) Contractor's certification of the value of, and partial or final waivers of lien covering, all Work for which payment is then requested and (b) Contractor's certification that all prior Progress Payments have been properly applied to the payment or reimbursement of the costs with respect to which they were paid. C, Work Entire. This Contract and the Work are entire and the Work as a whole is of the essence of this Contract. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Contract, each and every part of this Contract and of the Work are interdependent and common to one another and to Owner's obligation to pay all or any part of the Contract Price or any other consideration for the Work. Any and all Progress Payments made pursuant to this Article are provided merely for the convenience of Contractor and for no other purpose. 5.4 Final Acceptance and Final Pa ment A. Notice of Completion. When the Work has been completed and is ready in all respects for acceptance by Owner, Contractor must notify Owner and request a final inspection ("Notice of Completion"). Contractor's Notice of Completion must be given sufficiently in advance of the Completion Date to allow for scheduling of the final inspection and for completion or correction before the Completion Date of any items identified by such inspection as being defective, damaged, flawed, unsuitable, nonconforming, incomplete, or otherwise not in full compliance with, or as required by or pursuant to, this Contract ("Punch List Work"). B. Punch List and Final Acceptance. The Work may be finally accepted when, and only when, the whole and all parts thereof have been completed to the satisfaction of Owner in full compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to, this Contract. Upon receipt of Contractor's Notice of Completion, Owner must make a review of the Work and notify Contractor in writing of all Punch List Work, if any, to be completed or corrected. Following Contractor's completion or correction of all Punch List Work, Owner must make another review of the Work and prepare and deliver to Contractor either a written notice of additional Punch List Work to be completed or corrected or a written notice of final acceptance of the Work ("Final Acceptance"). C. Final Paynent. As soon as practicable after Final Acceptance, Contractor must submit to Owner a properly completed final Pay Request in the form provided by Owner ("Final Pay Request"). Owner must pay to Contractor the balance of the Contract Price, after deducting -10- CONTRACT therefrom all charges against Contractor as provided for in this Contract ("Final Payment"). Final Payment must be made not later than 60 days after Owner approves the Final Pay Request. The acceptance by Contractor of Final Payment will operate as a full and complete release of Owner of and from any and all lawsuits, claims, demands, damages, liabilities, losses, and expenses of, by, or to Contractor for anything done, famished for, arising out of, relating to, or in connection with the Work or for or on account of any act or neglect of Owner arising out of, relating to, or in connection with the Work. 5.5 Liens A. Title. Nothing in this Contract may be construed as vesting in Contractor any right of property in any equipment, materials, supplies, and other items provided under this Contract after they have been installed in, incorporated into, attached to, or affixed to, the Work or the Work Site. All such equipment, materials, supplies, and other items will, upon being so installed, incorporated, attached or affixed, become the property of Owner, but such title will not release Contractor from its duty to insure and protect the Work in accordance with the requirements of this Contract. B. Waivers of Lien. Contractor must, from time to time at Owner's request and in any event prior to Final Payment, famish to Owner such receipts, releases, affidavits, certificates, and other evidence as may be necessary to establish, to the reasonable satisfaction of Owner, that no lien against the Work or the public funds held by Owner exists in favor of any person whatsoever for or by reason of any equipment, material, supplies, or other item furnished, labor performed, or other thing done in connection with the Work or this Contract ("Lien") and that no right to file any Lien exists in favor of any person whatsoever. C. Removal of Liens. If at any time any notice of any Lien is filed, then Contractor must, promptly and without charge, discharge, remove, or otherwise dispose of such Lien. Until such discharge, removal, or disposition, Owner will have the right to retain from any money payable hereunder an amount that Owner, in its sole judgment, deems necessary to satisfy such Lien and to pay the costs and expenses, including attorneys' fees and administrative expenses, of any actions brought in connection therewith or by reason thereof. D. Protection of Owner Onl . This Section does not operate to relieve Contractor's surety or sureties from any of their obligations under the Bonds, nor may it be deemed to vest any right, interest, or entitlement in any subcontractor or supplier. Owner's retention of funds pursuant to this Section is deemed solely for the protection of its own interests pending removal of such Liens by Contractor, and Owner will have no obligation to apply such funds to such removal but may, nevertheless, do so where Owner's interests would thereby be served. 5.6 Deductions A. Owner's Right to Withhold. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Contract and without prejudice to any of Owner's other rights or remedies, Owner will have the right at any time or times, whether before or after approval of any Pay Request, to deduct and withhold from any Progress or Final Payment that may be or become due under this Contract such amount -11- CONTRACT as may reasonably appear necessary to compensate Owner for any actual or prospective loss due to: (1) Work that is defective, damaged, flawed, unsuitable, nonconforming, or incomplete; (2) damage for which Contractor is liable under this Contract; (3) state or local sales, use, or excise taxes from which Owner is exempt; (4) Liens or claims of Lien regardless of merit; (5) claims of subcontractors, suppliers, or other persons regardless of merit; (6) delay in the progress or completion of the Work; (7) inability of Contractor to complete the Work; (8) failure of Contractor to properly complete or document any Pay Request; (9) any other failure of Contractor to perform any of its obligations under this Contract; or (10) the cost to Owner, including attorneys' fees and administrative costs, of correcting any of the aforesaid matters or exercising any one or more of Owner's remedies set forth in Section 6.3 of this Contract. B. Use of Withheld Funds. Owner is entitled to retain any and all amounts withheld pursuant to Subsection 5.6A above until Contractor has either performed the obligations in question or furnished security for such performance satisfactory to Owner. Owner is entitled to apply any money withheld or any other money due Contractor under this Contract to reimburse itself for any and all costs, expenses, losses, damages, liabilities, suits, judgments, awards, attorneys' fees and administrative expenses incurred, suffered, or sustained by Owner and chargeable to Contractor under this Contract. ARTICLE VI: DISPUTES AND REMEDIES 6.1 Dispute Resolution Procedure A. Notice of Disputes and Objections. If Contractor disputes or objects to any requirement, direction, instruction, interpretation, determination, or decision of Owner, Contractor may notify Owner in writing of its dispute or objection and of the amount of any equitable adjustment to the Contract Price or Contract Time to which Contractor claims it will be entitled as a result thereof; provided, however, that Contractor must, nevertheless, proceed without delay to perform the Work as required, directed, instructed, interpreted, determined, or decided by Owner, without regard to such dispute or objection. Unless Contractor so notifies Owner within two business days after receipt of such requirement, direction, instruction, interpretation, determination, or decision, Contractor is conclusively deemed to have waived all such disputes or objections and all claims based thereon. B. Negotiation of Disputes and Objections. To avoid and settle without litigation any such dispute or objection, Owner and Contractor agree to engage in good faith negotiations. Within three business days after Owner's receipt of Contractor's written notice of dispute or objection, a conference between Owner and Contractor will be held to resolve the dispute. Within three business days after the end of the conference, Owner must render its final decision, in writing, to Contractor. if Contractor objects to the final decision of Owner, then it must, within three business days, give Owner notice thereof and, in such notice, must state its final demand for settlement of the dispute. Unless Contractor so notifies Owner, Contractor will be conclusively deemed (1) to have agreed to and accepted Owner's final decision and (2) to have waived all claims based on such final decision. -12- CONTRACT 6.2 Contractor's Remedies If Owner fails or refuses to satisfy a final demand made by Contractor pursuant to Section 6.1 of this Contract, or to otherwise resolve the dispute which is the subject of such demand to the satisfaction of Contractor, within 10 days after receipt of such demand, then Contractor will be entitled to pursue such remedies, not inconsistent with the provisions of this Contract, as it may have in law or equity. 6.3 Owner's Remedies If it should appear at any time prior to Final Payment that Contractor has failed or refused to prosecute, or has delayed in the prosecution of, the Work with diligence at a rate that assures completion of the Work in full compliance with the requirements of this Contract on or before the Completion Date, or has attempted to assign this Contract or Contractor's rights under this Contract, either in whole or in part, or has falsely made any representation or warranty in this Contract, or has otherwise failed, refused, or delayed to perform or satisfy any other requirement of this Contract or has failed to pay its debts as they come due ("Event of Default'), and has failed to cure any such Event of Default within five business days after Contractor's receipt of written notice of such Event of Default, then Owner will have the right, at its election and without prejudice to any other remedies provided by law or equity, to pursue any one or more of the following remedies: 1. Owner may require Contractor, within such reasonable time as may be fixed by Owner, to complete or correct all or any part of the Work that is defective, damaged, flawed, unsuitable, nonconforming, or incomplete; to remove from the Work Site any such Work; to accelerate all or any part of the Work; and to take any or all other action necessary to bring Contractor and the Work into strict compliance with this Contract. 2. Owner may perform or have performed all Work necessary for the accomplishment of the results stated in Paragraph 1 above and withhold or recover from Contractor all the cost and expense, including attorneys' fees and administrative costs, incurred by Owner in connection therewith. 3. Owner may accept the defective, damaged, flawed, unsuitable, nonconforming, incomplete, or dilatory Work or part thereof and make an equitable reduction in the Contract Price. 4. Owner may terminate this Contract without liability for further payment of amounts due or to become due under this Contract. 5. Owner may, without terminating this Contract, terminate Contractor's rights under this Contract and, for the purpose of completing or correcting the Work, evict Contractor and take possession of all equipment, materials, supplies, tools, appliances, plans, specifications, schedules, manuals, drawings, and other papers relating to the Work, whether at the Work Site or elsewhere, and either complete SRI CONTRACT or correct the Work with its own forces or contracted forces, all at Contractor's expense. 6. Upon any termination of this Contract or of Contractor's rights under this Contract, and at Owner's option exercised in writing, any or all subcontracts and supplier contracts of Contractor will be deemed to be assigned to Owner without any further action being required, but Owner may not thereby assume any obligation for payments due under such subcontracts and supplier contracts for any Work provided or performed prior to such assignment. 7. Owner may withhold from any Progress Payment or Final Payment, whether or not previously approved, or may recover from Contractor, any and all costs, including attorneys' fees and administrative expenses, incurred by Owner as the result of any Event of Default or as a result of actions taken by Owner in response to any Event of Default. 8. Owner may recover any damages suffered by Owner. 6.4 Owner's Additional Remedv for Dela If the Work is not completed by Contractor, in full compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to, this Contract, within the Contract Time as such time may be extended by Change Order, then Owner may invoke its remedies under Section 6.3 of this Contract or may, in the exercise of its sole and absolute discretion, permit Contractor to complete the Work but charge to Contractor, and deduct from. any Progress or Final Payments, whether or not previously approved, administrative expenses and costs for each day completion of the Work is delayed beyond the Completion Date, computed on the basis of the "Per Diem Administrative Charge" set forth in Attachment A, as well as any additional damages caused by such delay. 6.5 Terminations and Suspensions Deemed for Convenience Any termination or suspension of Contractor's rights under this Contract for an alleged default that is ultimately held unjustified will automatically be deemed to be a termination or suspension for the convenience of Owner under Section 1.15 of this Contract. ARTICLE VII: LEGAL RELATIONSHIPS AND REQUIREMENTS 7.1 Binding Effect This Contract is binding on Owner and Contractor and on their respective heirs, executors, administrators, personal representatives, and permitted successors and assigns. Every reference in this Contract to a party is deemed to be a reference to the authorized officers, employees, agents, and representatives of such party. -14- CONTRACT 7.2 Relationship of the Parties Contractor will act as an independent contractor in providing and performing the Work. Nothing in, nor done pursuant to, this Contract may be construed (1) to create the relationship of principal and agent, partners, or joint venturers between Owner and Contractor or (2) except as provided in Paragraph 6.3(6) above, to create any relationship between Owner and any subcontractor or supplier of Contractor. 7.3 No CoBusion/Prohibited Interests Contractor hereby represents that the only persons, firms, or corporations interested in this Contract as principals are those disclosed to Owner prior to the execution of this Contract, and that this Contract is made without collusion with any other person, firm, or corporation. If at any time it is found that Contractor has, in procuring this Contract, colluded with any other person, firm, or corporation, then Contractor will be liable to Owner for all loss or damage that Owner may suffer thereby, and this Contract will, at Owner's option, be null and void. Contractor hereby represents and warrants that neither Contractor nor any person affiliated with Contractor or that has an economic interest in Contractor or that has or will have an interest in the Work or will participate, in any manner whatsoever, in the Work is acting, directly or indirectly, for or on behalf of any person, group, entity or nation named by the United States Treasury Department as a Specially Designated National and Blocked Person, or for or on behalf of any person, group, entity or nation designated in Presidential Executive Order 13224 as a person who commits, threatens to commit, or supports terrorism, and neither Contractor nor any person affiliated with Contractor or that has an economic interest in Contractor or that has or will have an interest in the Work or will participate, in any manner whatsoever, in the Work is, directly or indirectly, engaged in, or facilitating, the Work on behalf of any such person, group, entity or nation. 7.4 Assignment Contractor may not (1) assign this Contract in whole or in part, (2) assign any of Contractor's rights or obligations under this Contract, or (3) assign any payment due or to become due under this Contract without the prior express written approval of Owner, which approval may be withheld in the sole and unfettered discretion of Owner; provided, however, that Owner's prior written approval will not be required for assignments of accounts, as defined in the Illinois Commercial Code, if to do so would violate Section 9-318 of the Illinois Commercial Code, 810 ILCS 519-318. Owner may assign this Contract, in whole or in part, or any or all of its rights or obligations under this Contract, without the consent of Contractor. 7.5 Confidential information All information supplied by Owner to Contractor for or in connection with this Contract or the Work must be held confidential by Contractor and may not, without the prior express written consent of Owner, be used for any purpose other than performance of the Work. -15- CONTRACT 7.6 No Waiver No examination, inspection, investigation, test, measurement, review, determination, decision, certificate, or approval by Owner, nor any order by Owner for the payment of money, nor any payment for, or use, occupancy, possession, or acceptance of, the whole or any part of the Work by Owner, nor any extension of time granted by Owner, nor any delay by Owner in exercising any right under this Contract, nor any other act or omission of Owner may constitute or be deemed to be an acceptance of any defective, damaged, flawed, unsuitable, nonconforming or incomplete Work, equipment, materials, or supplies, nor operate to waive or otherwise diminish the effect of any warranty or representation made by Contractor; or of any requirement or provision of this Contract; or of any remedy, power, or right of Owner. 7.7 No Third Party Beneficiaries No claim as a third party beneficiary under this Contract by any person, firm, or corporation other than Contractor may be made or be valid against Owner. 7.8 Notices All notices required or permitted to be given under this Contract must be in writing and are deemed received by the addressee thereof when delivered in person on a business day at the address set forth below or on the third business day after being deposited in any main or branch United States post office, for delivery at the address set forth below by properly addressed, postage prepaid, certified or registered mail, return receipt requested. Notices and communications to Owner must be addressed to, and delivered at, the following address: Village of Oak Brook 1200 Oak Brook Road Oak Brook, Illinois 60523 Attention: Doug Patchin, Public Works Director Notices and communications to Contractor must be addressed to, and delivered at, the following address: Bee Liner Lean Services 9444 Oak Park Avenue Oak lawn Illinois 60453 Attention: Mourad Chekhar The foregoing may not be deemed to preclude the use of other non -oral means of notification or to invalidate any notice properly given by any such other non -oral means. -16- CONTRACT By notice complying with the requirements of this Section, Owner and Contractor each have the right to change the address or addressee or both for all future notices to it, but no notice of a change of address is effective until actually received. 7.9 Governing Laws This Contract and the rights of Owner and Contractor under this Contract will be interpreted according to the internal laws, but not the conflict of laws rules, of the State of Illinois; venue for any action related to this Contract will be in the Circuit Court of DuPage County, Illinois. 7.10 Changes in Laws Unless otherwise explicitly provided in this Contract, any reference to laws includes such laws as they may be amended or modified from time to time. 7.11 Compliance with Laws A. Compliance Required. Contractor must give all notices, pay all fees, and take all other action that may be necessary to ensure that the Work is provided, performed, and completed in accordance with all required governmental permits, licenses or other approvals and authorizations that may be required in connection with providing, performing, and completing the Work, and with all applicable statutes, ordinances, rules, and regulations, including without limitation the Illinois Prevailing Wage Act, 820 ILCS 13010.01 et seq. (see Subsection C of this Section) (a copy of the prevailing rate of wages ascertained by the Illinois Department of Labor, in effect as of the date of this Contract, has been attached as an Appendix to this Contract; if the Illinois Department of Labor revises the prevailing rate of hourly wages to be paid, the revised rate applies to this Contract); any other applicable prevailing wage laws; the Fair Labor Standards Act; any statutes regarding qualification to do business; any statutes requiring preference to laborers of specified classes; the Illinois Steel Products Procurement Act, 30 ILCS 565/1 et seq.; any statutes prohibiting discrimination because of, or requiring affirmative action based on, race, creed, color, national origin, age, sex, or other prohibited classification, including, without limitation, the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, 42 U.S.C. §§ 12101 et seq., the Illinois Human Rights Act, 775 ILCS 51I-101 et seq., and the Public Works Discrimination Act, 775 ILCS 10/0.0I et seq.; and any statutes regarding safety or the performance of the Work, including the Illinois Underground Utility Facilities Damage Prevention Act, 220 ILCS 5011 et seq., and the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, 29 U.S.C. §§ 651 et seq. B. Liability for Fines, Penalties. Contractor is solely liable for any fines or civil penalties that are imposed by any governmental or quasi -governmental agency or body that may arise, or be alleged to have arisen, out of or in connection with Contractor's, or its subcontractors' or suppliers', performance of, or failure to perform, the Work or any part thereof. C. Prevailin Wa e Act. Contractor and each subcontractor, in order to comply with the Prevailing Wage Act, 820 ILCS 130/0.01 et seq. (the "Act"), must submit to the Village a -17- CONTRACT certified payroll on a monthly basis, in accordance with Section 5 of the Act. The certified payroll must consist of a complete copy of those records required to be made and kept by the Act. The certified payroll must be accompanied by a statement signed by the contractor or subcontractor that certifies that (1) such records are true and accurate, (2) the hourly rate paid is not less than the general prevailing rate of hourly wages required by the Act, and (3) the contractor or subcontractor is aware that filing a certified payroll that he or she knows to be false is a Class B misdemeanor. Contractor may rely on the certification of a subcontractor, provided that Contractor does not knowingly rely on a subcontractor's false certification. On two business days' notice, Contractor and each subcontractor must make available for inspection the records required to be made and kept by the Act (i) to the Village and its officers and agents and to the Director of the Illinois Department of Labor and his or her deputies and agents and (ii) at all reasonable hours at a location within the State. D. Required Provisions Deemed Inserted. Every provision of law required by law to be inserted into this Contract is deemed to be inserted herein. 7.12 Com fiance with Patents A. Assumption of Costs, Royalties, and Fees. Contractor will pay or cause to be paid all costs, royalties, and fees arising from the use on, or the incorporation into, the Work, of patented equipment, materials, supplies, tools, appliances, devices, processes, or inventions. B. Effect of Contractor Being„.Enjoined. Should Contractor be enjoined from furnishing or using any equipment, materials, supplies, tools, appliances, devices, processes, or inventions supplied or required to be supplied or used under this Contract, Contractor must promptly offer substitute equipment, materials, supplies, tools, appliances, devices, processes, or inventions in lieu thereof, of equal efficiency, quality, suitability, and market value, for review by Owner. If Owner should disapprove the offered substitutes and should elect, in lieu of a substitution, to have supplied, and to retain and use, any such equipment, materials, supplies, tools, appliances, devices, processes, or inventions as may by this Contract be required to be supplied, Contractor must pay such royalties and secure such valid licenses as may be requisite and necessary for Owner to use such equipment, materials, supplies, tools, appliances, devices, processes, or inventions without being disturbed or in any way interfered with by any proceeding in law or equity on account thereof. Should Contractor neglect or refuse to make any approved substitution promptly, or to pay such royalties and secure such licenses as may be necessary, then Owner will have the right to make such substitution, or Owner may pay such royalties and secure such licenses and charge the cost thereof against any money due Contractor from Owner or recover the amount thereof from Contractor and its surety or sureties notwithstanding that Final Payment may have been made. 7.13 Time The Contract Time is of the essence of this Contract. Except where otherwise stated, references in this Contract to days is construed to refer to calendar days. -18- CONTRACT 7.14 Severability The provisions of this Contract will be interpreted when possible to sustain their legality and enforceability as a whole. In the event any provision of this Contract is held invalid, illegal, or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, in whole or in part, neither the validity of the remaining part of such provision, nor the validity of any other provisions of this Contract will be in any way affected thereby. 7.15 Entire Aareement This Contract sets forth the entire agreement of Owner and Contractor with respect to the accomplishment of the Work and the payment of the Contract Price therefor, and there are no other understandings or agreements, oral or written, between Owner and Contractor with respect to the Work and the compensation therefor. 7.16 Amendments No modification, addition, deletion, revision, alteration or other change to this Contract is effective unless and until such change is reduced to writing and executed and delivered by Owner and Contractor. [SIGNATURE PAGE FOLLOWS] -19- CONTRACT IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Owner and Contractor .have caused this Contract to be executed by their properly authorized representatives in two original counterparts as of the Effective Date. VILLAC By: Name: Title: Attest: By. Name: Title: BEE LINER LEAN SERVICES M111 STATE OF ILLINOIS COUNTY OF CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION SS CONTRACTOWS. CERTIFICATION contractor's executing officer], being first duly sworn on oath, deposes and states that all statements herein made are made on behalf of Contractor, that this deponent is authorized to make them, and that the statements contained herein are true and correct. Contractor deposes, states, and certifies that Contractor is not barred from contracting with a unit of state or local government as a result of (i) a violation of either Section 33E-3 or. Section 33E-4 of Article 33E of the Criminal Code of 1961, 720 ILCS 5133E-1 et seM, .; or (ii) a violation of the USA Patriot Act of 2001, 107 Public Law 56 (October 26, 2001) (the "Patriot Act") or other statutes, orders, rules, and regulations of the United States government and its various executive departments, agencies and offices related to the subject matter of the Patriot Act, including, but not limited to, Executive Order 13224 effective September 24, 2001. DATED: ry , 20� Subscribed and Sworn to before me onNUkt-& �J , 20 P -- My Commission expires: 7i.4714, u is (SEAL) MOOR HALAWA Official Seal Notary Public - SfaN Of 111in0is MY Commission Expires Jul 13, 2020 VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK BUTLER GOVERNMENT CENTER LONER LEVEL RESTROOM RENOVATIONS PROJECT ATTACHMENT A SUPPLEMENTAL SCHEDULE OF CONTRACT TERMS )Check applicahle boxes and insert required information.) 1. Pr_,,, oject: Provide and install all materials needed for the Butler Government Center Lower Level Restroom Renovations Project. The general contractor shall provide and install all materials, unless noted otherwise. The scope of work includes but is not necessarily limited to the following: Plumbing upgrades, fixture replacement, new interior finishes including porcelain tile, new toilet partitions, new toilet accessories, painting, fire suppression, and electric as shown on the drawings and described herein. 2. Work Site: 1200 Oak Brook Road, Oak Brook, Illinois 60523. 3. Permits, Licenses, Approvals and Authorizations: Contractor must obtain all required governmental permits, licenses, approvals, and authorizations. 4. Commencement Date: Ten (10) days after execution of the Contract by Owner. Village anticipates work to start on November 6, 2017. 5. Completion Date: Substantially completed by February 28, 2018, The Completion Date will be subject to equitable adjustment if the Commencement Date is delayed pursuant to Subsection 2.2A of the Contract. 6. Insurance Coverage: Certificates of Insurance shall be presented to Owner within fifteen (15) days after the -1- ATTACHMENT A receipt by the Contractor of the Notice of Award and the unexecuted contract, it being understood and agreed that the Owner will not approve and execute the Contract until acceptable insurance certificates are received and approved by Owner. Each contractor performing any work pursuant to a contract with Owner and each permittee working under a permit as required pursuant to the provisions of Title 1 of Chapter 8 of the Code of Ordinances of the Village of Oak Brook (hereinafter referred to as "Insured") shall be required to carry such insurance as specified herein. Such contractor and permittee shall procure and maintain for the duration of the contract or permit insurance against claims for injuries to persons or damages to property which may arise from or in connection with the performance of the work under the contract or permit, either by the contractor, permittee, or their agents, representatives, employees or subcontractors. A contractor or permittee shall maintain insurance with limits no less than: A. General Liability - $2,000,000 combined single limit per occurrence for bodily injury, personal injury and property damage, provided that when the estimated cost of the work in question does not exceed $25,000, the required limit shall be $1,000,000; B. Automobile Liability (if applicable) - $1,000,000 combined single limit per accident for bodily injury and property damage; C. Worker's Compensation and Employer's Liability - Worker's Compensation limits as required by the Labor Code of the State of Illinois and Employer's Liability limits of $1,000,000 per accident. Any deductibles or self-insured retention must be declared to and approved by Owner. At the option of Owner, either the insurer shall reduce or eliminate such deductible or self- insured retention as respect to Owner, its officers, officials, employees and volunteers; or the Insured shall procure a bond guaranteeing payment of losses and related investigations, claim administration and defense expenses to the extent of such deductible or self-insured retention. The policies shall contain, or be endorsed to contain, the following provisions: D. General Liability and Automobile Liability Coverage - (1) The Owner, its officers, officials, employees, volunteers, and Kluber Architects & Engineers, are to be covered as additional insureds as respects: liability arising out of activities performed by or on behalf of the Insured; premises owned, occupied or used by the Insured. The coverage shall contain no special limitations on the scope of protection afforded to the Owner, its officers, officials, employees, volunteers, or agents. -2- ATTACHMENT A (2) The Insured's insurance coverage shall be primary insurance as respect to the Owner, its officers, officials, employees, volunteers and agents. Any insurance or self-insurance maintained by the Owner, its officers, officials, employees, volunteers or agents shall be in excess of the Insured's insurance and shall not contribute with it. (3) Any failure to comply with reporting provisions of the policies shall not affect coverage provided to the Owner, its officers, officials, employees, volunteers or agents. (4) The Insured's insurance shall apply separately to each covered party against whom claim is made or suit is brought except with respect to the limits of the insurer's liability. E. Worker's Compensation and Employer's Liability Coverage The policy shall waive all rights of subrogation against the Owner, its officers, officials, employees, volunteers and agents for losses arising from work performed by the insured for the Owner. Each insurance policy shall be endorsed to state that coverage shall not be suspended, voided, canceled by either party, reduced in coverage or in limits except after thirty (30) days prior written notice by certified mail has been given to Owner. Each insurance policy shall name the Owner, its officers, officials and employees, volunteers and agents as Additional Insureds. Insurance is to be placed with insurers with a Best's rating of no less than A: VII. Each Insured shall furnish the Owner with certificates of insurance and with original endorsements effecting coverage required by this provision. The certificate and endorsements for each insurance policy are to be signed by a person authorized by that insurer to bind coverage on its behalf The certificates and endorsements are to be on forms approved by the Owner and shall be subject to approval by the Village Attorney before work commences. The Owner reserves the right to require complete, certified copies of all required insurance policies, at any time. Each insured shall include all subcontractors as insureds under its policies or shall furnish separate certificates and endorsements for each subcontractor. All coverages for subcontractors shall be subject to all of the requirements stated herein. ❑ D. Builders Risk Insurance. This insurance must be written in completed value form, must protect Contractor and Owner against "all risks" of direct physical loss to buildings, structures, equipment, and materials to be used in providing, performing, and completing the Work, including without limitation fire extended coverage, vandalism and malicious mischief, sprinkler leakage, -3- ATTACHMENT A flood, earth movement and collapse, and must be designed for the circumstances that may affect the Work. This insurance must be written with limits not less than the insurable value of the Work at completion. The insurable value must include the aggregate value of Owner -furnished equipment and materials to be constructed or installed by Contractor. This 'insurance must include coverage while equipment or materials are in warehouses, during installation, during testing, and after the Work is completed, but prior to Final Payment. This insurance must include coverage while Owner is occupying all or any part of the Work prior to Final Payment without the need for the insurance company's consent. ❑ E. Owner's and Contractor's Protective Liability Insurance. Contractor, at its sole cost and expense, must purchase this Insurance in the name of Owner with a combined single limit for bodily injury and property damage of not less than $1,000,000. F. Umbrella Policy. The required coverage may be in the form of an umbrella policy above $2,000,000 primary coverage. All umbrella policies must provide excess coverage over underlying insurance on a following -form basis so that, when any loss covered by the primary policy exceeds the limits under the primary policy, the excess or umbrella policy becomes effective to cover that loss. ❑ G. Deductible. Each policy must have a deductible or self-insured retention of not more than $ klA H. Owner as Additional Insured. Owner must be named as an Additional Insured on the following policies: General Liability The Additional Insured endorsement must identify Owner as follows: The Village of Oak Brook and its boards, commissions, committees, authorities, employees, agencies, officers, voluntary associations, and other units operating under the jurisdiction and within the appointment of its budget. C! ATTACHMENT A 1. Other Parties as Additional Insureds. In addition to Owner, the following parties must be named as additional insured on the following policies: Additional Insured Policy or Policies Kluber Architects „& Engineers 7. Contract Price: SCHEDULE OF PRICES A. LUMP SUM CONTRACT 1. For providing, performing, and completing all Work, the total Contract Price of (write in numbers): $69, 000.00 In words: Sixty Nine Thousand Dollars 8. Progress Payments: A. General. Owner must pay to Contractor 90 percent of the Value of Work, determined in the manner set forth below, installed and complete in place up to the day before the Pay Request, less the aggregate of all previous Progress Payments. The total amount of Progress Payments made prior to Final Acceptance by Owner may not exceed 90 percent of the Contract Price. B. Value of Work. The Value of the Work will be determined as follows: (1) Lump Sum, Items. For all Work to be paid on a lump sum basis, Contractor must, not later than 10 days after execution of the Contract and before submitting its first Pay Request, submit to Owner a schedule showing the value of each component part of such Work in form and with substantiating data acceptable to Owner (`Breakdown Schedule"). The sum of the items listed in the Breakdown Schedule must equal the amount or amounts set forth in the Schedule of Prices for Lump Sum Work. An unbalanced Breakdown Schedule providing for overpayment of Contractor on component parts of the Work to be performed first will not be accepted. The Breakdown Schedule must be revised and resubmitted until acceptable to Owner. No payment may be made for any lump sum item until Contractor has submitted, and Owner has approved, an acceptable Breakdown Schedule. -5- ATTACHMENT A Owner may require that the approved Breakdown Schedule be revised based on developments occurring during the provision and performance of the Work. If Contractor fails to submit a revised Breakdown Schedule that is acceptable to Owner, Owner will have the right either to suspend Progress and Final Payments for Lump Sum Work or to make such Payments based on Owner's determination of the value of the Work completed. (2) Unit Price Items. For all Work to be paid on a unit price basis, the value of such Work will be determined by Owner on the basis of the actual number of acceptable units of Unit Price Items installed and complete in place, multiplied by the applicable Unit Price set forth in the Schedule of Prices. The actual number of acceptable units installed and complete in place will be measured on the basis described in Attachment B to the Contract or, in the absence of such description, on the basis determined by Owner. The number of units of Unit Price Items stated in the Schedule of Prices are Owner's estimate only and may not be used in establishing the Progress or Final Payments due Contractor. The Contract Price will be adjusted to reflect the actual number of acceptable units of Unit Price Items installed and complete in place upon Final Acceptance. C. Application of PgMents. All Progress and Final Payments made by Owner to Contractor will be applied to the payment or reimbursement of the costs with respect to which they were paid and will not be applied to or used for any pre- existing or unrelated debt between Contractor and Owner or between Contractor and any third party. 9. Per Diem Administrative Char e: $500 per day. 10. Standard Specifications: The Contract also includes Owner's Village Code and Building Codes. References to any of these codes means the latest editions effective on the date of the bid opening. See Attachment D for any special project requirements. -6- ATTACHMENT B VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK BUTLER GOVERNMENT CENTER LOWER LEVEL RESTROOM RENOVATIONS PROJECT ATTACHMENT B SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 00 0101 PROJECT TITLE PAGE PROJECT MANUAL FOR Butler Government Center Lower Level Restroom Renovations 1200 Oak Brook Road Oak Brook, IL 60523 OWNER Village of Oak Brook 1200 Oak Brook Road Oak Brook, IL 60523 ARCH ITECTIENGINEER KLUBER ARCHITECTS + ENGINEERS 10 S. SHUMWAY AVE. BATAVIA, ILLINOIS 60510 PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 000101-1 DOCUMENT 00 01 01 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved PROJECT TITLE PAGE SECTION 00 0107 SEALS PAGE 1.01 DESIGN PROFESSIONALS' SEALS A. ARCHITECT B. MECHANICAL ENGINEER C. ELECTRICAL ENGINEER END OF DOCUMENT PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 000107-2 DOCUMENT 00 0107 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SEALS PAGE SECTION 00 0110 TABLE OF CONTENTS PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS PAGES Introductory Information 00 01 01 Project Title Page 000101-1-1 00 01 07 Seals Page 000107-1-1 0001 10 Table of Contents 0001 10-1-2 0001 15 Drawing Index 0001 15-1-1 0031 13 Preliminary Schedule 0031 13-1-1 SPECIFICATIONS PAGES Division 01 -- General Requirements 01 10 00 Summary 011000-1-2 01 3000 Administrative Requirements (1 page attachment) 013000-1-5 01 4100 Regulatory Requirements 014100-1-2 01 4200 References 014200-1-5 01 5000 Temporary Facilities and Controls 015000-1-2 01 6000 Product Requirements (1 page attachment) 016000-1-4 01 7000 Execution and Closeout Requirements 017000-1-6 01 7800 Closeout Submittals 017800-1-4 01 7900 Demonstration and Training 017900-1-3 Division 02 •- Existing Conditions 024100 Demolition 024100-1-2 Division 03 •• Concrete 03 30 00 Cast -in -Place Concrete 033000-1-9 Division 04 •• Masonry 04 20 02 Single -Wythe Unit Masonry 042002-1-3 Division 06 -- Wood, Plastics, and Composites 061000 Rough Carpentry 061000-1-3 Division 07 •- Thermal and Moisture Protection 07 84 00 Firestopping 078400-1-4 07 90 05 Joint Sealers 079005-1-4 PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 0001 10-3 DOCUMENT 00 01 10 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TABLE OF CONTENTS Division 08 -- Openings 08 31 00 Access Doors and Panels 083100-1-2 Division 09 -- Finishes 09 05 61 Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation 090561-1-5 0921 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies 0921 16-1-5 09 30 00 Tiling 093000-1-6 09 51 00 Acoustical Ceilings 095100-1-3 09 90 00 Painting and Coating 099000-1-6 Division 10 -- Specialties 1021 13.13 Metal Toilet Compartments 10 2113,13-1-3 10 28 00 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories 102800-1-3 Division 12 -- Furnishings 12 36 00 Countertops 123600-1-4 Division 21 -- Fire Suppression 21 05 00 Common Work Results for Fire Suppression 210500-1-2 21 1300 Fire -Suppression Sprinkler Systems 211300-1-2 Division 22 •- Plumbing 22 07 19 Plumbing Piping Insulation 220719-1-4 221005 Plumbing Piping 221005-1-6 221006 Plumbing Piping Specialties 221006-1-3 22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures 224000-1-5 Division 23 -- Heating, Ventilating, and Air -Conditioning (HVAC) 23 31 00 HVAC Ducts and Casings 233100-1-3 23 37 00 Air Outlets and Inlets 233700-1-2 Division 26 -- Electrical 26 05 00 Basic Electrical Requirements 260500-1-8 26 51 00 Lighting 265100-1-7 END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 17-210-9103 0001 10-4 DOCUMENT 00 0110 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 00 0115 DRAWING INDEX GENERAL G100 COVER SHEET, GENERAL NOTES, SYMBOLS & DRAWING INDEX G201 ACCESSIBILITY & MOUNTING INFORMATION ARCHITECTURAL A310 FLOOR PLANS AND REFLECTED CEILING PLANS A800 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE A900 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL AND PLUMBING MEP310 MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL AND PLUMBING FLOOR PLANS, SCHEDULES END OF DOCUMENT PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 000115-5 DOCUMENT 00 01 15 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved DRAWING INDEX SECTION 00 3113 PRELIMINARY SCHEDULE 1.01 GENERAL A. The following represents the preliminary construction schedule for the Work, This schedule is the current estimate of the Owner to be used for purposes of bidding. All bidders shall include the costs of all overtime, double -shift, or so-called "premium" time that may be necessary to meet this milestone. 1.02 PRELIMINARY SCHEDULE A. Award of Contract: Anticipated October 24, 2017 B. Commencement of Construction: November 6, 2017 C. Substantial Completion: Februrary 28, 2018 END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 0031 13-6 SECTION 00 3113 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved PRELIMINARY SCHEDULE SECTION 0110 00 SUMMARY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 PROJECT A. Project Name: Butler Government Center Lower Level Restroom Renovations. B. Owner's Name: Village of Oakbrook. C. Architect/Engineer's Name: Kluber Architects + Engineers. D. The Project consists of the alteration of existing toilet rooms at the Govemment Center. Work includes plumbing upgrades, fixture replacement, new interior finishes including porcelain tile, new toilet partitions, new toilet accessories, painting, fire suppression & electric. 1.02 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION A. Contract Type: A single prime contract based on Lump Sum Contract as described in the Village of Oak Brook Contract for Butler Government Center Restroom Renovations Bid Package Document. 1.03 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERATIONS WORK A. Scope of alterations work is shown on drawings. 1.04 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. Owner intends to continue to occupy adjacent portions of the existing building during the entire construction period. B. Owner intends to occupy the Project upon Substantial Completion, C. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict and to facilitate Owner's operations. D. Schedule the Work to accommodate Owner occupancy. 1.05 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES A. Arrange use of site and premises to allow: 1. Owner occupancy. 2. Use of site and premises by the public. B. Provide access to and from site as required by law and by Owner: 1. Emergency Building Exits During Construction: Keep all exits required by code open during construction period; provide temporary exit signs if exit routes are temporarily altered. 2. Do not obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or other public ways without permit. C. Existing building spaces may not be used for storage. D. Utility Outages and Shutdown: 1. Do not disrupt or shut down life safety systems, including but not limited to fire sprinklers and fire alarm system, without 7 days notice to Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Limit shutdown of utility services to 2 hours at a time, arranged at least 24 hours in advance with Owner. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 011000-7 SECTION 0110 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SUMMARY 3. Prevent accidental disruption of utility services to other facilities. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION PROJECT N0. 17-210-1103 01 1000-8 SECTION 01 10 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SUMMARY SECTION 0130 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preconstruction meeting. B. Site mobilization meeting. C. Progress meetings. D. Construction progress schedule. E. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout. F. Architect/Engineer-provided CAD files. G. Number of copies of submittals. H. Submittal procedures. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 0170 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Additional coordination requirements. B. Section 0178 00 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Architect/Engineer will schedule a meeting after Notice of Award. B. Attendance Required: 1. Owner. 2. Architect/Engineer. 3. Contractor. 4. Contractors of major trades as invited to attend meeting. C. Agenda: 1. Architect will prepare and provide agenda for this meeting only. D. Architect will provide minutes and distribute copies to all participants and those affected by decisions made for this meeting only. 3.02 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum monthly intervals. B. Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings. C. Attendance Required: 1. Contractor. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 013000-9 SECTION 0130 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 2. Owner. 3. ArchitectJEngineer, 4. Contractor's Superintendent, D. Agenda; 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of Work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems that impede, or will impede, planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 8. Maintenance of progress schedule. 7. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 8. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 9. Coordination of projected progress. 10. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 11. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 12.Other business relating to Work. E. Contractor shall record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with copies to Arch itectJE ng in eer, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.03 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. Within 7 days after date of the Agreement, submit preliminary schedule. B. If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule within 7 days. C. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment. 3.04 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review: 1. Product data. 2. Shop drawings. 3. Samples for selection. 4. Samples for verification. S. Submit to Arch itectJEng ineer for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. C. Samples will be reviewed only for aesthetic, color, or finish selection. D. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article below and for record documents purposes described in Section 0178 00 - Closeout Submittals. 3.05 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information; 1. Design data. 2. Certificates, 3. Test reports. 4. Inspection reports. 5. Manufacturer's instructions. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 01 30 00 -10 SECTION 0130 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 6. Manufacturer's field reports. 7. Other types indicated. B. Submit for Architect/Engineer's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner, No action will be taken. 3.06 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Submit Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion, B. Submit Final Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion, C. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout: 1. Project record documents. 2. Operation and maintenance data. 3. Warranties. 4. Bonds. 5. Other types as indicated. D. Submit for Owner's benefit during and after project completion. 3.07 ARCHITECTIENGINEER-PROVIDED CAD FILES A. After the execution of the Contract, Architect/Engineer will provide, free of charge, upon receipt of a properly completed and signed request utilizing "Electronic Data Transfer Consent Form" at the end of this Specification Section, CAD files depicting graphic information for the project as follows: 1. Architectural Floor Plans: Column grid, walls, floors, stairs, doors, windows, room numbers, ceiling grid, mechanical diffusers, plumbing fixtures, sprinkler heads (if depicted in Bid Documents) and lights, B. Contractor acknowledges and accepts that the Architectural Floor Plans do not contain structural, mechanical, electrical, plumbing, fire protection and other building systems information depicted in the Bidding Documents. Examples of information not contained in these files include, but are not limited to, title blocks, keynotes, schedules, mechanical ductwork and equipment, electrical device symbols, circuit numbers and home runs, plumbing equipment, piping runs and riser diagrams, and architectural/engineering text or details. No other CAD files, data or information will be provided. C. Only requests from Prime Contractors will be honored. Subcontractors must obtain the files from their respective Prime Contractors. D. In submitting a request, Contractor acknowledges that: 1. Architect/Engineer bears no responsibility for the data or its transmission, 2. Use of the data by the Contractor or his subcontractors in no way relieves the Contractor of his obligations under the Contract, 3. Contractor is solely liable for any and all claims arising from any and all products generated by the Contractor or Its Subcontractors employing the data, 4. Contractor and its Subcontractors have a limited, non-exclusive license to use the data solely in connection with the Work of the Project, and that 5. Architect/Engineer retains all rights, including copyright, to the data. 3,08 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS A. Documents for Review: PROJECT NO, 17-210-1103 013000-11 SECTION 0130 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 1. Small Size Sheets: Not Larger Than 11 x 17 inches. Submit two (2) paper copies, one of which will be retained by Architect/Engineer. Contractor shall make his own copies from the original returned by the Architect. a. Contractor's Option: In lieu of paper copies indicated above, submit in Adobe PDF electronic file format via email. Architect will return a reviewed copy in Adobe PDF electronic file format via email. Create PDFs at native size and right -side up; illegible files will be rejected, 2. Large Size Sheets: Larger Than 11 x17 inches; 36 x 48 inches maximum. Submit two (2) paper copies, one of which will be retained by Architect/Engineer. Electronic file format (PDF or other) is NOT acceptable. Contractor shall make his own copies from the original returned by the Architect. B. Documents for Information: Submit one copy. C. Samples: Submit the number specified in individual specification sections; one of which will be retained by Architect/Engineer. 1. After review, produce duplicates. 2. Retained samples will not be returned to Contractor unless specifically so stated. 3.09 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Shop Drawing Procedures: 1. Prepare accurate, drawn -to -scale, original shop drawing documentation by interpreting the Contract Documents and coordinating related Work. 2. Generic, non -project specific information submitted as shop drawings do not meet the requirements for shop drawings. B. Transmit each submittal with a copy of approved submittal form. C. Transmit each submittal with AIA Form G810. D. Sequentially number the transmittal form. Revise submittals with original number and a sequential alphabetic suffix. E. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, and specification section number, as appropriate on each copy. F. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents, G. Deliver submittals to Architect/Engineer at business address. N. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items. I. For each submittal for review, allow 20 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor. J. Clearly identify variations from the Contract Documents. Regardless of the type of variation, Contractor is solely responsible for errors in the field that arise from submittal variations from the requirements of the Contract Documents if those variations were not expressly noted to specifically identify for and describe to the reviewer the nature of the variation from the Contract Documents. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 013000-12 SECTION 0130 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS K. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations that may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. L. Correlate submitted items with specified products; clearly indicate the specified product that corresponds to each submitted item. M. When options or optional features available for a Product are indicated in a submittal, and selections for those options/features are indicated in the Contract Documents, identify on the submittal the selection indicated in the Contract Documents. N. Provide space for Contractor and Architect/Engineer review stamps. 0. When revised for resubmission, using clouds, highlights or other means acceptable to the Architect, identify all changes made since previous submission, Resubmittals that do not clearly identify all changes may be delayed and/or returned to the Contractor unreviewed. P. The Contractor is entitled to one (1) resubmittal of any Shop Drawing, Product Data, or Closeout Submittal item rejected by the Architect or returned by the Architect for further action. Thereafter, the Contractor shall pay the cost of all further Architect's reviews of Shop Drawing, Product Data or Closeout Submittal, at a rate of $200.00/hour. Cost of such further reviews will be deducted from the Contract Sum by Change Order. Q. Distribute reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with requirements. R. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed. S. Submittal reviews may be delayed and/or submittals may be returned unreviewed for any of the following reasons: 1. Submittals submitted outside the scheduled dates of the Submittal Schedule. 2. Submittals are incomplete or are missing information. 3. Submittals are not submitted in accordance with procedures outlined in this Section (i.e. spec Section number not indicated, missing Contractor's review stamp, submitted items not correlated with specified products). END OF SECTION PROJECT N0, 17-210-1103 013000-13 SECTION 0130 00 Copyright 2017 by K.UBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS SECTION 014100 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A, General, B, Definitions, C. Quality Assurance, D. Regulatory Requirements. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 1000 -Summary. B. Section 0142 00 - References. 1.03 GENERAL A. Comply with all applicable laws, rules, regulations, codes and ordinances. B. If the Contractor observes that the Contract Documents may be at variance with specified codes, notify the Architect/Engineer immediately. Architect/Engineer shall issue all changes in accordance with the General Conditions. C. It shall not be the Contractor's primary responsibility to make certain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with all applicable laws, rules and regulations, however, when the Contractor performs work knowing or having reason to know that the work in question is contrary to applicable laws, rules, and regulations, and fails to notify the Architect/Engineer, the Contractor shall pay all costs arising therefrom. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions: 1. Codes: Codes are statutory requirements, rules or regulations of governmental entities. 2. Standards: Standards are requirements that have been established as accepted criteria, set general consent. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Architect/Engineer has designed the project to applicable code requirements and has copies of said codes available for the Contractor's inspection. B. The Contractor shall: 1. Ensure that copies of codes and standards referenced herein or specified in individual specifications sections are available to Contractor's personnel, agents, and Sub -Contractors. 2. Ensure that Contractor's personnel, agents, and Sub -Contractors are familiar with the workmanship and requirements of applicable codes and standards. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Source and Requirements: Verify amendments with local code officials. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 014100-14 SECTION 01 41 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC,; All Rights Reserved REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1. Local code requirements: a, ICC International Building Code, 2015 Edition. b. ICC International Existing Building Code, 2015 Edition. c. ICC International Mechanical Code, 2015Edition. d. ICC International Fire Code, 2015Edition. e. ICC International Property Maintenance Code, 2015Edition. f. NEC Electrical Code, 2014Edition. 2. State code requirements: a. Capital Development Board (CDB): 1) Illinois Accessibility Code, 1997 Edition. 2) Illinois Energy Conservation Code (ICC International Energy Conservation Code, 2015 Edition, with State of Illinois modifications. b. Illinois Department of Labor (IDOL): Safety Glazing Materials Act - Illinois Revised Statutes, chap. 111 1f2, paragraph 3101, et seq. c. Illinois Department of Public Health (IDPH): 1) Illinois Plumbing Code (Illinois Administrative Code, Title 77, Chapter 1, Subchapter r, Part 890). d. Illinois Environmental Protection Agency (TEPA): 1) Air -Pollution Standards. 2) Noise Pollution Standards, 3) Water Pollution Standards. 4) Public Water Supplies 5) Solid Waste Standards, 5) Illinois Recommended Standards for Sewage Works (Illinois Administrative Code, Title 35, Subtitle C, Chapter 11, Part 370). e. Illinois State Fire Marshal (OSFM): 1) Boiler & Pressure Vessel Safety Code (Illinois Administrative Code, Title 44, Chapter I, Part 120). 2) Illinois Rules & Regulations for Fire Prevention & Safety (as amended). 3) Gasoline and Volatile Oils (Illinois Revised Statutes, chap. 17 112, paragraph 31, et seq.). 3. Information and Requirements for Utility Services: Local utility companies. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 01 41 00 -15 SECTION 01 41 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS SECTION 0142 00 REFERENCES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Drawing symbols, abbreviations and acronyms. B. Definitions of terms used throughout the Contract Documents, C. Explanation of specification format and content. D. Requirements relating to referenced standards. E. Applicability of referenced standards. F. List of industry organizations and certain of their respective documents. 1.02 DRAWING SYMBOLS AND CONVENTIONS A. Abbreviations and graphic symbols are defined on the General Notes, Symbols & Abbreviations sheet of the drawings. B. Generally, symbols used on the mechanical and electrical drawings conform to those recommended by ASHRAE, though, where appropriate, these symbols are supplemented by more specific symbols as recommended by ASME, ASPE, or the IEEE. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Where the terms "indicated", "noted", "scheduled", "shown", or "specified" are used it is to help locate the reference; no limitation on location is intended except as specifically noted. B. Where the terms "directed", "requested", "authorized", "approved", are used as in "directed by the Architect/Engineer", no implied meaning shall be construed to extend the Architect/Engineer's responsibilities into the Contractor's purview of construction supervision. C. Where the term "approved" is used in conjunction with the Arch itect/Engineer`s action on submittals, requests or applications it is limited to the duties of the Architect/Engineer as described in the Agreement, and the General and Supplemental Conditions of the Contract. Such use of the term "approval" shall not limit or release the Contractor from his responsibility to fulfill Contract requirements. D. Where the term "regulations" is used it means all applicable statutes, laws, ordinances, and orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as construction industry standards, rules, or conventions that address performance of the Work. E. Where the term "furnish" is used it means supply, deliver, and unload to the construction site ready for assembly and incorporation into the Work. F. Where the term "install" is used it is meant to describe operations at the job site to include unloading, assembling, placing, anchoring, finishing, protecting, cleaning and all other similar operations required to fully incorporate an item into the Work. G. Where the term "provide" is used it means "furnish and install" as defined above. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 01 42 00 -16 SECTION 0142 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC,; All Rights Reserved REFERENCES H. The "Project Site" is the space available to the Contractor for performance of construction activities. The Project Site may be for the exclusive use of the Contractor and his activities or may be used in conjunction with others with others performing other construction or related activities on the Project. The Extent of the Project Site is indicated on the drawings. 1.04 SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONTENT A. These Specifications are based on the Construction Specification Institute's 49 Division format and numbering system. B. Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is an abbreviated type. Implied words and meanings will appropriately interpreted. C. Requirements expressed in imperative and streamlined language are to be performed by the Contractor. At certain locations in the text, subjective language may be used to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor or others. 1. Whenever a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase, it shall be construed to mean the words "shall be". D. Use of certain terms such as "carpentry" is not intended to imply that certain activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name. The Specifications do, however, require that certain construction activities shall be performed by specialists who are recognized experts in the operations to be performed. Specialists shall be used for said activities, however the final responsibility for fulfilling the requirements of the Contract remains the Contractors. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. For products or workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not included in the Project Manual, also referred to as reference standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. Conform to reference standard of date of issue specified in this section, except where a specific date is established by applicable code. C. Obtain copies of standards when required by the Contract Documents. D. Maintain copy at project site during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific work, until Substantial Completion. E. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from the Architect/Engineer before proceeding. F. Neither the contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor those of the Architect/Engineer shall be altered by the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. 1.06 APPLICABILITY OF INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Construction industry standards shall have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly in the Contract Documents, except where more stringent requirements are specified. All such applicable standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 01 42 00 -17 SECTION 0142 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC,; All Rights Reserved REFERENCES 1. Where compliance with two or more standards are referenced and conflicting requirements for quality or quantities occur, comply with the more stringent requirements. Refer questions regarding apparently conflicting standards to the Architect for a decision before proceeding. 2. The standard of quality or quantity levels specified, shown, or referenced shall be the minimum to be provided or performed. Refer questions regarding standards of minimum quality or quantity to the Architect before proceeding. 1.07 CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY ORGANIZATIONS AND DOCUMENTS A. AA --ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION, INC. B. AABC -- ASSOCIATED AIR BALANCE COUNCIL C. AAMA —AMERICAN ARCHITECTURAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION D. AASHTO -- AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS E. ACI -- AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE INTERNATIONAL F. AISC -- AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INC. G. ANSI AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE H. ASHRAE -- AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING ENGINEERS, INC. L ASME -- THE AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS 1. ASME A17.1 - Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators, 2004. J. ASTM -- AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS K. AWI -- ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK INSTITUTE L. AWPA -- AMERICAN WOOD -PRESERVERS' ASSOCIATION M. AWS -- AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY N. BHMA -- BUILDERS HARDWARE MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION 0. CPSC -- CONSUMER PRODUCTS SAFETY COMMISSION P. DHI -- DOOR AND HARDWARE INSTITUTE Q. DIN -- DEUTSCHES INSTITUT FUR NORMUNG R. FM -- FACTORY MUTUAL RESEARCH CORPORATION S. ICC -- INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL, INC. T. IEEE -- INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC ENGINEERS U. ISO -- INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS ORGANIZATION V. MFMA -- MAPLE FLOORING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION W. NAAMM -- THE NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ARCHITECTURAL METAL MANUFACTURERS PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 01 42 00 -18 SECTION 0142 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved REFERENCES X. NCMA -- NATIONAL CONCRETE MASONRY ASSOCIATION Y. NEBB -- NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL BALANCING BUREAU Z. NEMA -- NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION AA. NFPA -- NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION AB. NRCA -- NATIONAL ROOFING CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION AC. PCI -- PRECAST/PRESTRESSED CONCRETE INSTITUTE AD. SDI -- STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE AE, SDI -- STEEL DECK INSTITUTE, INC. AF. SGCC -- SAFETY GLAZING CERTIFICATION COUNCIL AG. SIGMA - SEALED INSULATING GLASS MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (See IGMA) AH. SJI -- STEEL JOIST INSTITUTE A]. SMACNA -- SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS` NATIONAL ASSOCIATION, INC. AJ.SSPC -- THE SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS AK. TCA -- TILE COUNCIL OF AMERICA, INC. AL. UL -- UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC. AM. USG -- UNITED STATES GYPSUM 1. USG (HB) - Gypsum Construction Handbook; Seventh Edition. AN. WWPA -- WESTERN WOOD PRODUCTS ASSOCIATION 1.08 UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT AND RELATED AGENCIES/DOCUMENTS A. CFR -- CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS B. CPSC -- CONSUMER PRODUCTS SAFETY COMMISSION C. EPA -- ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY D. FS -- FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS (General Services Administration) E. GSA -- U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION F. USGS -- UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY 1.09 STATE GOVERNMENT AND RELATED AGENCIESIDOCUMENTS A. CDB -- ILLINOIS CAPITAL DEVELOPMENT BOARD B. IDOL -- ILLINOIS DEPARTMENT OF LABOR C. IDPH -- ILLINOIS DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC HEALTH D. ]EPA -- ILLINOIS ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 01 42 00 -19 SECTION 0142 00 Copyright 2017 by KLt1BER, INC.; All Rights Reserved REFERENCES E. OSFM -- OFFICE OF THE ILLINOIS STATE FIRE MARSHAL. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 014200-20 SECTION 0142 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved REFERENCES SECTION 0150 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary utilities. B. Temporary telecommunications services. C. Temporary sanitary facilities. D. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures, and fencing. E. Security requirements. F. Vehicular access and parking. G. Waste removal facilities and services. 1.02 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Owner will provide the following: 1. Electrical power , consisting of connection to existing facilities. 2. Water supply, consisting of connection to existing facilities. B. Existing facilities may be used. 1.03 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICES A. Telecommunications services shall include: 1. One (1) mobile cellular telephone for each of Contractor's and any Subcontractor's field personnel. 1.04 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Use of existing facilities is permitted. B. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition. C. At end of construction, return facilities to same or better condition as originally found. 1.05 BARRIERS A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public, to allow for owner's use of site and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition. B, Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public rights-of-way C. Protect non -owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 015000-21 SECTION 0150 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC,; All Rights Reserved TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.06 INTERIOR ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary partitions and ceilings as indicated to separate work areas from Owner - occupied areas, to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into Owner -occupied areas, and to prevent damage to existing materials and equipment. B. Construction: Framing and reinforced polyethylene sheet materials with closed joints and sealed edges at intersections with existing surfaces: 1.07 SECURITY A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, existing facilities, and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft. 1.08 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING A. Comply with regulations relating to use of streets and sidewalks, access to emergency facilities, and access for emergency vehicles. B. Coordinate access and haul routes with governing authorities and Owner. C. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions. D. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets. 1.09 WASTE REMOVAL A. Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and orderly condition. B. Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site periodically. C. If materials to be recycled or re -used on the project must be stored on-site, provide suitable non- combustible containers; locate containers holding flammable material outside the structure unless otherwise approved by the authorities having jurisdiction. 1.10 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Substantial Completion inspection. B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. C. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION PROJECT N0, 17-210-1103 015000-22 SECTION 0150 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS SECTION 0160 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. General product requirements. B. Re -use of existing products. C. Transportation, handling, storage and protection. D. Product option requirements. E. Substitution limitations and procedures. F. Procedures for Owner -supplied products, G. Maintenance materials, including extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project. B. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EXISTING PRODUCTS A. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents. B. Unforeseen historic items encountered remain the property of the Owner; notify Owner promptly upon discovery; protect, remove, handle, and store as directed by Owner. C. Existing materials and equipment indicated to be removed, but not to be re -used, relocated, reinstalled, delivered to the Owner, or otherwise indicated as to remain the property of the Owner, become the property of the Contractor; remove from site. D. Specific Products to be Reused: The reuse of certain materials and equipment already existing on the project site is required. 2.02 NEW PRODUCTS A. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents. B. Designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with industry standards. 2.03 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting those standards or description. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 016000-23 SECTION 0160 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named. 2,04 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software of types and in quantities specified in individual specification sections. B. Deliver to Project site and place in location directed by Owner's representative; obtain Owner's signature on receipt for delivery prior to final payment. Submit signed receipts with Closeout Submittals. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES A. Substitutions Prior To Bid Opening: Architect/Engineer will consider a written request for substitution provided that such request is received at least seven (7) days prior to the Bid opening date. Requests received after that time will not be considered. 1. If a request is approved, the Architect/Engineer will issue and appropriate addendum not less than three (3) days prior to the Bid opening date. B. Substitutions After Notice of Award: Architect/Engineer will consider a request for substitution only under one or more of the following conditions: 1. Substitution is required for compliance with final interpretation of code requirements or insurance regulations. 2. Specified product is not available through no fault of the Contractor. 3. Specified product is not compatible with other specified materials/equipment. 4. Manufacturer will not certify or warranty specified product as required. C. Document each request utilizing Substitution Request Form following this section with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. Incomplete requests will not be considered. D. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work that may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent. 5. Will reimburse Owner for Architect/Engineer review or redesign services associated with re - approval by authorities having jurisdiction over the Project. E. Substitutions of products or product characteristics/components/accessories will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on Contractor's submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents, whether rejection of said substitutions is expressly identified by Architect/Engineer on Contractor's submittals or not. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 016000-24 SECTION 0160 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS F. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. Submit two copies of request for substitution for consideration. Submit a separate Substitution Request Form and accompanying documentation for each proposed substitution. 2. Provide the following minimum documentation with each Substitution Request Form: a. Product identification, manufacturer, product data including dimensions and weight, performance and installation instructions. b. Side-by-side itemized comparison of proposed substitution with specified product. c. Coordination information including other modifications required as a result of proposed substitution. d. Cost information including the effect of the proposed substitution on the Contract Sum. 3. Sign and date the Substitution Request Form, 4. Architect/Engineer will notify submitter in writing of decision to accept or reject request. 3.02 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Package products for shipment in manner to prevent damage, for equipment, package to avoid loss of factory calibration. B. If special precautions are required, attach instructions prominently and legibly on outside of packaging. C. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site storage time and potential damage to stored materials. D. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of surrounding areas. F. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. G. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. H. Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible. 3.03 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Designate receivinglstorage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and misapplication. B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible. D. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment favorable to product. E. Protect products from damage or deterioration due to construction operations, weather, precipitation, humidity, temperature, sunlight and ultraviolet light, dirt, dust, and other contaminants. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 016000-25 SECTION 0160 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS F. Comply with manufacturer's warranty conditions, if any. G. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining. H. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 016000-26 SECTION 0160 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS SECTION 0170 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures. B. Requirements for alterations work, including selective demolition. C. Pre -installation meetings. D. Cutting and patching. E. Surveying for laying out the work. F. Cleaning and protection. G. Starting of systems and equipment, H. Demonstration and instruction of Owner personnel. I. Closeout procedures, including Contractor's Correction Punch List, except payment procedures. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures. B. Section 0178 00 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents, Operation and maintenance data, warranties and bonds. C. Section 0179 00 - Demonstration and Training: Demonstration of products and systems to be commissioned and where indicated in specific specification sections 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration that affects: 1. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate Contractor. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A.. Dust Control Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. Provide positive means to prevent air -borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere and over adjacent property. B. Noise Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to minimize noise produced by construction operations. C. Pest and Rodent Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent pests and insects from damaging the work. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 017000-27 SECTION 0170 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. B. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. C. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work that are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Fallow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable, place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. D. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS A. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching and extending work. B. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution described in Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. B. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize waste due to over -ordering or misfabrication. C. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work, assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond. 3.03 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. When required in individual specification sections, convene a preinstallation meeting at the site prior to commencing work of the section. B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 017000-28 SECTION 0170 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS C. Notify Architect/Engineer four days in advance of meeting date. D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting: 1. Review conditions of examination, preparation and installation procedures. 2. Review coordination with related work. E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Arch itecUEngineer, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.04 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement. B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated. 3.05 ALTERATIONS A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and existing record documents only. 1. Report discrepancies to Architect/Engineer before disturbing existing installation. 2. Beginning of alterations work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions. B. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work. 1. Remove items indicated on drawings. 2. Relocate items indicated on drawings. 3. Where new surface finishes are to be applied to existing work, perform removals, patch, and prepare existing surfaces as required to receive new finish; remove existing finish if necessary for successful application of new finish. 4. Where new surface finishes are not specified or indicated, patch holes and damaged surfaces to match adjacent finished surfaces as closely as possible. C. Services (including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, and Electrical): Remove, relocate, and extend existing systems to accommodate new construction. 1. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to equipment and operational components; if necessary, modify installation to allow access or provide access panel, 2. Where existing systems or equipment are not active and Contract Documents require reactivation, put back into operational condition; repair supply, distribution, and equipment as required. 3. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready for service. a. Disable existing systems only to make switchovers and connections; minimize duration of outages. b. Provide temporary connections as required to maintain existing systems in service. 4. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 017000-29 SECTION 0170 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 5. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, including those above accessible ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stub and tag with identification; patch holes left by removal using materials specified for new construction. D. Clean existing systems and equipment. E. Remove demolition debris and abandoned items from alterations areas and dispose of off-site; do not burn or bury. F. Do not begin new construction in alterations areas before demolition is complete. G. Comply with all other applicable requirements of this section. 3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching. B. See Alterations article above for additional requirements. C. Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to: 1. Complete the work. 2. Fit products together to integrate with other work. 3. Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services 4. Match work that has been cut to adjacent work. 5. Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition, 6. Repair new work damaged by subsequent work. 7. Remove and replace defective and non -conforming work. D. Execute work by methods that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to original condition. E. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval. F. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. G. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. H. Patching: 1. Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. On continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. 2. Match color, texture, and appearance. 3. Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections due to patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate, repair substrate prior to repairing finish. 3.07 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. PROJECT NO, 17-210-1103 017000-30 SECTION 01 70 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and dispose off-site; do not bum or bury. 3.06 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations. B. provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage. D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. E. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. F. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle plastic coverings if possible. 3.09 SYSTEM STARTUP A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. C. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. D. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractor personnel and manufacturer's representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. E. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 3.10 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION A. See Section 0179 00 - Demonstration and Training. 3.11 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. B. Test, adjust and balance HVAC systems. 3.12 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to final project assessment. 1. Clean areas to be occupied by Owner prior to final completion before Owner occupancy. B. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous. C. Remove all labels that are not permanent. Do not paint or otherwise cover fire test labels or nameplates on mechanical and electrical equipment. PROJECT NO. 17-210-9103 017000-31 SECTION 0170 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS D. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned. E. Remove waste, surplus materials, trashlrubbish, and construction facilities from the site; dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury. 3.13 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities. 1. Provide copies to Architect/Engineer and Owner. B. Accompany Project Coordinator on preliminary inspection to determine items to be listed for completion or correction in the Contractor's Correction Punch List for Contractor's Notice of Substantial Completion, C. Notify Architect/Engineer when work is considered ready for ArchitecuEngineer's Substantial Completion inspection. D. Submit written certification containing Contractor's Correction Punch List, that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been inspected, and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect/Engineer's Substantial Completion inspection. E. Conduct Substantial Completion inspection and create Final Correction Punch List containing Architect/Engineer's and Contractor's comprehensive list of items identified to be completed or corrected and submit to Architect/Engineer. F. Correct items of work listed in Final Correction Punch List and comply with requirements for access to Owner -occupied areas. G. Notify Architect/Engineer when work is considered finally complete and ready for Architect/Engineer's Substantial Completion final inspection. H. Complete items of work determined by Architect/Engineer listed in executed Certificate of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 017000-32 SECTION 0170 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS SECTION 0178 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Project Record Documents, B. Operation and Maintenance Data. C. Warranties and bonds. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 0130 00 -Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop drawings, product data, and samples. B. Section 0170 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Contract closeout procedures. C. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data. D. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Architect/Engineer with claim for final Application for Payment. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before start of Work. Architect/Engineer will review draft and return one copy with comments. 2. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by Owner, submit completed documents within ten days after acceptance. 3. Submit one copy of completed documents 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy will be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Architect/Engineer comments. Revise content of all document sets as required prior to final submission. 4. Submit two sets of revised final documents in final form within 10 days after final inspection. C. Warranties and Bonds: 1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner's permission, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance. 2. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final Application for Payment. 3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A, Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 0178 00-33 SECTION 0178 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda, 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner. C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction. D. Record information concurrent with construction progress. E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications. F. Record Drawings : Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Details not on original Contract drawings. 3.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Source Data: For each product or system, list names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts. B. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information. C. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. D. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. For Each Item of Equipment and Each System: 1. Description of unit or system, and component parts. 2. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. 3. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests. 4. Complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts. B. Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printed instructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation and maintenance of the specific products. C. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut -down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions. D. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative maintenance and trouble shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 017800-34 SECTION 0178 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS E. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions. F. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. G. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. H. Provide control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed. I. Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. J. Include test and balancing reports. K. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections. 3.04 ASSEMBLY OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Assemble operation and maintenance data into durable manuals for Owner's personnel use, with data arranged in the same sequence as, and identified by, the specification sections. B. Where systems involve more than one specification section, provide separate tabbed divider for each system. C. Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of described products. D. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual. E. Binders: Commercial quality, 8-112 by 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers; 2 inch maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings. F. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS; identify title of Project; identify subject matter of contents. G. Project Directory: Title and address of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of ArchitecUEngineer, Consultants, Contractorand subcontractors, with names of responsible parties. H. Tables of Contents; List every item separated by a divider, using the same identification as on the divider tab; where multiple volumes are required, include all volumes Tables of Contents in each volume, with the current volume clearly identified. I. Dividers: Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system; identify the contents on the divider tab; immediately following the divider tab include a description of product and major component parts of equipment. J. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 24 pound paper. K. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages. 3.05 WARRANTIES AND BONDS A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 017800-35 SECTION 0178 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial completion is determined. B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. C. Co -execute submittals when required. D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. E. Include originals of each in operation and maintenance manuals, indexed separately on Table of Contents. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 017800-36 SECTION 0178 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS SECTION 0179 00 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Demonstration of products and systems where indicated in specific specification sections. B. Training of Owner personnel in operation and maintenance is required for: 1. All software -operated systems. 2. HVAC systems and equipment. 3. Plumbing equipment. 4. Items specified in individual product Sections. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 0178 00 - Closeout Submittals: Operation and maintenance manuals. B. Other Specification Sections: Additional requirements for demonstration and training. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Training Plan: Owner will designate personnel to be trained; tailor training to needs and skill -level of attendees. 1. Submit to ArchitecUEngineer for transmittal to Owner. 2. Submit not less than two weeks prior to start of training. 3. Revise and resubmit until acceptable. 4. Provide an overall schedule showing all training sessions. 5. Include at least the following for each training session: a. Identification, date, time, and duration. b. Description of products and/or systems to be covered. c. Name of firm and person conducting training; include qualifications. d. Intended audience, such as job description. e. Objectives of training and suggested methods of ensuring adequate training. f. Methods to be used, such as classroom lecture, live demonstrations, hands-on, etc. g. Media to be used, such a slides, hand-outs, etc. h. Training equipment required, such as projector, projection screen, etc., to be provided by Contractor. C. Training Manuals: Provide training manual for each attendee, allow for minimum of two attendees per training session. 1. Include applicable portion of 0&M manuals. 2. Include copies of all hand-outs, slides, overheads, video presentations, etc., that are not included in 0&M manuals. 3. Provide one extra copy of each training manual to be included with operation and maintenance data. D. Training Reports: 1. Identification of each training session, date, time, and duration. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 017900-37 SECTION 0179 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 2. Sign -in sheet showing names and job titles of attendees. 3. List of attendee questions and written answers given, including copies of and references to supporting documentation required for clarification; include answers to questions that could not be answered in original training session. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Instructor Qualifications: Familiar with design, operation, maintenance and troubleshooting of the relevant products and systems. 1. Provide as instructors the most qualified trainer of those contractors and/or installers who actually supplied and installed the systems and equipment. 2. Where a single person is not familiar with all aspects, provide specialists with necessary qualifications. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 DEMONSTRATION - GENERAL A. Demonstrations conducted during system start-up do not qualify as demonstrations for the purposes of this section, unless approved in advance by Owner. B. Demonstration may be combined with Owner personnel training if applicable. C. Operating Equipment and Systems: Demonstrate operation in all modes, including start-up, shut- down, seasonal changeover, emergency conditions, and troubleshooting, and maintenance procedures, including scheduled and preventive maintenance. 1. Perform demonstrations not less than two weeks prior to Substantial Completion. 2. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season within six months. 3.02 TRAINING - GENERAL A. Conduct training on-site unless otherwise indicated. B. Owner will provide classroom and seating at no cost to Contractor. C. Provide training in minimum two hour segments. D. Training schedule will be subject to availability of Owner's personnel to be trained; re -schedule training sessions as required by Owner; once schedule has been approved by Owner failure to conduct sessions according to schedule will be cause for Owner to charge Contractor for personnel "show -up" time. E. Review of Facility Policy on Operation and Maintenance Data: During training discuss: 1. The location of the 0&M manuals and procedures for use and preservation; backup copies. 2. Typical contents and organization of all manuals, Including explanatory information, system narratives, and product specific information. 3. Typical uses of the 0&M manuals. F. Product- and System -Specific Training: 1. Review the applicable 0&M manuals. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 017900-38 SECTION 0179 00 Copyright 2017 by KLU$ER, INC.; All Rights Reserved DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 2. For systems, provide an overview of system operation, design parameters and constraints, and operational strategies. 3. Review instructions for proper operation in all modes, including start-up, shut -down, seasonal changeover and emergency procedures, and for maintenance, including preventative maintenance. 4. Provide hands-on training on all operational modes possible and preventive maintenance. 5. Emphasize safe and proper operating requirements; discuss relevant health and safety issues and emergency procedures. 6. Discuss common troubleshooting problems and solutions. 7. Discuss any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation. 8. Discuss warranties and guarantees, including procedures necessary to avoid voiding coverage. 9. Review recommended tools and spare parts inventory suggestions of manufacturers. 10.Review spare parts and tools required to be furnished by Contractor. 11 Review spare parts suppliers and sources and procurement procedures. G. Be prepared to answer questions raised by training attendees; if unable to answer during training session, provide written response within three days. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 017900-39 SECTION 0179 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING SECTION 02 4100 DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Selective demolition of building elements for alteration purposes. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 0110 00 - Summary: Limitations on Contractor's use of site and premises. B. Section 0150 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Protective barriers and waste removal. C. Section 0170 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Project conditions and existing construction to remain. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 29 CFR 1926 - U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Standards; current edition. PART 2 PRODUCTS -- NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SCOPE A. Remove portions of existing building surfaces to accommodate new materials installation. B. Remove other items indicated, for salvage, relocation, and recycling. 3.02 GENERAL PROCEDURES AND PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with other requirements specified in Section 0170 00. B. Comply with applicable codes and regulations for demolition operations and safety of adjacent structures and the public. 1. Obtain required permits. 2. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices. 3. Use physical barriers to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public. 4. Conduct operations to minimize effects on and interference with adjacent structures and occupants. 5. Conduct operations to minimize obstruction of public and private entrances and exits; do not obstruct required exits at any time; protect persons using entrances and exits from removal operations. C. If hazardous materials are discovered during removal operations, stop work and notify Architect/Engineer and Owner; hazardous materials include regulated asbestos containing materials, lead, PCB's, and mercury. D. Perform demolition in a manner that maximizes salvage and recycling of materials. 1. Dismantle existing construction and separate materials. 2. Set aside reusable, recyclable, and salvageable materials; store and deliver to collection point or point of reuse. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 024100-40 SECTION 02 4100 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; AN Rights Reserved DEMOLITION 3.03 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ALTERATIONS A. Drawings showing existing construction are based on casual field observation and existing record documents only. 1. Verify that construction are as shown. 2. Report discrepancies to Architect/Engineer before disturbing existing installation. 3. Beginning of demolition work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions that would be apparent upon examination prior to starting demolition. B. Separate areas in which demolition is being conducted from other areas that are still occupied. 1. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary dustproof partitions of construction specified in Section 01 50 00 . C. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work. 1. Remove rotted wood, corroded metals, and deteriorated masonry and concrete; replace with new construction specified. 2. Remove items indicated on drawings. D. Services (Including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, and Electrical): Remove existing systems and equipment as indicated. 1. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to equipment and operational components. 2. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready for service. 3. See Section 01 10 00 for other limitations on outages and required notifications. 4. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities before removal. 5. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, including those above accessible ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stub and tag with identification. E. Protect existing work to remain. 1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary. 2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work. 3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work. 4. Patch as specified for patching new work. 3.04 DEBRIS AND WASTE REMOVAL A. Remove debris, junk, and trash from site. B. Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work. C. Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 024100-41 SECTION 02 4100 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved DEMOLITION SECTION 03 30 00 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete formwork. B. Floors and slabs on grade. C. Joint devices and accessories associated with concrete work. D. Concrete curing. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010. B. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete; 1991 (Reapproved 2009). C. ACI 211.2 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Structural Lightweight Concrete; 1998 (Reapproved 2004). D. ACI 301- Specifications for Structural Concrete; 2010 (Errata 2012). E. ACi 302.1 R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; 2004 (Errata 2007). F. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; 2000. G. AC1305 R - Hot Weather Concreting; 2010. H. AC1306 R - Cold Weather Concreting; 2010. I. ACI 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete; 2001 (Reapproved 2008). J. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2014 (Errata 2016). K. ACI 347R - Guide to Formwork for Concrete; 2014. L. ASTM A6151A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2016, M. ASTM Al0641A1064M - Standard Specification for Carbon -Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete; 2015. N. ASTM C331C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2016. 0. ASTM C941C94M - Standard Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete; 2016a, P. ASTM C1501C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2016. Q. ASTM C171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete; 2016, R. ASTM C2601C260M - Standard Specification for Air -Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2010a (Reapproved 2016). PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 033000-42 SECTION 03 30 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE S. ASTM C3O9 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane -Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete; 2011. T. ASTM C33O1C33OM - Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete; 2014, U. ASTM C4941C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2016. V. ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete; 2015. W. ASTM C88 1/C881 M - Standard Specification for Epoxy -Resin -Base Bonding Systems for Concrete; 2015. X. ASTM C1O591C1O59M - Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete; 2013. Y. ASTM C11071C1107M --Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic -Cement Grout (Nonshrink); 2O14a. Z. ASTM D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types); 2004 (Reapproved 2013). AA. ASTM D1752 -Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and Recycled PVC Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction; 2O04a (Reapproved 2013). AB, ASTM E1643 - Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation and Inspection of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs; 2011, AC. ASTM El 745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs; 2011. AD. NSF 372 -Drinking Water System Components -Lead Content; 2011, 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers` data on manufactured products showing compliance with specified requirements and installation instructions. 1. For curing compounds, provide data on method of removal in the event of incompatibility with floor covering adhesives. 2. Anchoring epoxy and expansion anchors. C. Mix Designs: 15 days prior to start of work, submit mix design for each type of concrete specified including back-up test data. D. Samples: Submit samples of underslab vapor retarder to be used. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318. B. Acquire cement from same source and aggregate from same source for entire project. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 033000-43 SECTION 03 30 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE C. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather. D. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather. FART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMWORK A. Formwork Design and Construction: Comply with guidelines of ACI 347R to provide formwork that will produce concrete complying with tolerances of ACI 117. B. Form Materials: Contractor's choice of standard products with sufficient strength to withstand hydrostatic head without distortion in excess of permitted tolerances. 1. Form Facing for Exposed Finish Concrete: Contractor's choice of materials that will provide smooth, stain -free final appearance. 2. Form Coating: Release agent that will not adversely affect concrete or interfere with application of coatings. 2.02 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A6151A615M, Grade 60 (60,000 psi). 1. Type: Deformed billet -steel bars. 2. Finish: Unfinished, unless otherwise indicated. B. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement (WWR) 1. Form: Flat sheets. 2. Mesh Size: 6 x 6. Galvanized, plain type, ASTM Al 0641A1 064M. C. Reinforcement Accessories: 1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage, 0.0508 inch. 2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of reinforcement during concrete placement. 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I - Normal Portland type. B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 33, C. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C330IC330M. D. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C. E. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete. 2.04 ADMIXTURES A. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight of cement. B. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C2601C260M. C. High Range Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C4941C494M Type G. D. High Range Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C4941C494M Type F. E. Water Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C4941C494M Type E. PROJECT N0, 17-210-1103 033000-44 SECTION 03 30 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE F. Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C4941C494M Type D. G. Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C4941C494M Type C. H. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494IC494M Type B. I. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C4941C494M Type A. 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Underslab Vapor Retarder: Multi -layer, fabric-, cord-, grid-, or aluminum -reinforced polyethylene or equivalent, complying with ASTM E1745, Class A; stated by manufacturer as suitable for installation in contact with soil or granular fill under concrete slabs. The use of single ply polyethylene is prohibited. 1. Installation: Comply with ASTM E1643. 2. Accessory Products: Vapor retarder manufacturer's recommended tape, adhesive, mastic, prefabricated boots, etc., for sealing seams and penetrations in vapor retarder. 3. Products: a. Insulation Solutions, Inc; Viper VaporCheck II 15 -mil (Class A): www.insulationsolutions.com. b. Intertape Polymer Group, Inc; VaporMaster 15: www.intertapepolymer.com. c. Stego Industries, LLC: www.stegoindustdes.com. d. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; PERMINATOR Class A -15 mils: www.wrmeadows.com. e. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. B. Non -Shrink Cementitious Grout: Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents. 1, Minimum Compressive Strength at 48 Hours: 2,000 pounds per square inch. 2. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days: 7,000 pounds per square inch. C. Liquid Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, clear or translucent, 2.06 BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTS A. Latex Bonding Agent: Non-redispersable acrylic latex, complying with ASTM C10591C1059M, Type 11. B. Epoxy Bonding System: C. Waterstops: Bentonite and butyl rubber, complying with NSF 61 and NSF 372. D. Slab Isolation Joint Filler: 112 inch thick, height equal to slab thickness, with removable top section that will form 112 inch deep sealant pocket after removal. 1. Material: ASTM D1751, cellulose fiber. E. Slab Contraction Joint Device: Preformed linear strip intended for pressing into wet concrete to provide straight route for shrinkage cracking. F. Construction Joint Devices: Integral galvanized steel; formed to tongue and groove profile, with removable top strip exposing sealant trough, knockout holes spaced at 6 inches, ribbed steel spikes with tongue to fit top screed edge. G. Sealant and Primer: As specified in Section 07 90 05, PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 033000-45 SECTION 03 30 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUSER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2.07 CURING MATERIALS A. Curing Compound, Naturally Dissipating: Clear, water-based, liquid membrane -forming compound; complying with ASTM C309. B. Moisture -Retaining Sheet: ASTM C171. 1. Curing paper, regular. 2. Polyethylene film, clear, minimum nominal thickness of 0.0040 in. 3. White -burlap -polyethylene sheet, weighing not less than 10 ounces per linear yard, 40 inches wide. C. Water: Potable, not detrimental to concrete. 2.08 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 2111 recommendations. B. Proportioning Structural Lightweight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.2 recommendations. C. Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for each type of concrete on the basis of field experience or trial mixtures, as specified in ACI 301. 1. For trial mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable to Architect/Engineer for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. D. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates recommended by manufacturer. Submit to Architect for review and approval. E. Normal Weight Concrete: Type "A". 1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C391C39M at 28 days: 3,000 pounds per square inch. 2. Fly Ash Content: Maximum 15 percent of cementitious materials by weight. 3. Water -Cement Ratio: Maximum 48 percent by weight, 4. Total Air Content: 2 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM C 1731C 173M. 5. Maximum Slump: 4 inches. & Maximum Aggregate Size: 314 inch. 2.09 MIXING A. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C941C94M. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Formwork: Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Design and fabricate forms to support all applied loads until concrete is cured, and for easy removal without damage to concrete. B. Verify that forms are clean and free of rust before applying release agent. C. Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 033000-46 SECTION 03 30 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE D. Where new concrete is to be bonded to previously placed concrete, prepare existing surface by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Use epoxy bonding system for bonding to damp surfaces, for structural load-bearing applications, and where curing under humid conditions is required. 2. Use latex bonding agent only for non -load-bearing applications. E. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert steel dowels and pack solid with non -shrink grout. F. Interior Slabs on Grade; Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints minimum 6 inches. Seal joints, seams and penetrations watertight with manufacturer's recommended products and follow manufacturer's written instructions. Repair damaged vapor retarder before covering. 1. Vapor Retarder Over Granular Fill: Install compactible granular fill before placing vapor retarder as shown on the drawings. Do not use sand. G. Set steel pipe bollards plumb. 3.03 INSTALLING REINFORCEMENT AND OTHER EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, and accurately position, support, and secure in place to achieve not less than minimum concrete coverage required for protection. B. Install welded wire reinforcement in maximum possible lengths, and offset end laps in both directions. Splice laps with tie wire. 3.04 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R. B. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1 R. C. Notify Architect/Engineer not less than 24 hours prior to commencement of placement operations. D. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. E. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, and formed construction joint devices will not be disturbed during concrete placement. F. Place concrete continuously without construction (cold) joints wherever possible; where construction joints are necessary, before next placement prepare joint surface by removing laitance and exposing the sand and sound surface mortar, by sandblasting or high-pressure waterjetting. G. Finish floors level and flat, unless otherwise indicated, within the tolerances specified below. 3.05 SLAB JOINTING A. Locate joints as indicated on the drawings. B. Anchor joint fillers and devices to prevent movement during concrete placement. C. Isolation Joints: Use preformed joint filler with removable top section for joint sealant, total height equal to thickness of slab, set flush with top of slab. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 033000-47 SECTION 03 30 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC,; All Rights Reserved CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1. Install wherever necessary to separate slab from other building members, including columns, walls, equipment foundations, footings, stairs, manholes, sumps, and drains. D. Load Transfer Construction and Contraction Joints: Install load transfer devices as indicated; saw cut joint at surface as indicated for contraction joints. E. Saw Cut Contraction Joints: Saw cut joints before concrete begins to cool, within 4 to 12 hours after placing; use 3116 inch thick blade and cut at least 1 inch deep but not less than one quarter (114) the depth of the slab. F. Repair underslab vapor retarder damaged during placement of concrete reinforcing. Repair with vapor retarder material; lap over damaged areas minimum 6 inches and seal watertight. G. Install joint devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. H. Install construction joint devices in coordination with floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete. I. Apply sealants in joint devices in accordance with Section 07 90 05. J. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction joints. K. Do not interrupt successive placement; do not permit cold joints to occur. L. Place floor slabs in checkerboard or saw cut pattern indicated. M. Grout under base plates to be troweled smooth, splay neatly to 45 degrees. 3.06 FLOOR FLATNESS AND LEVELNESS TOLERANCES A. Screed slabs on grade level, maintaining the following minimum F(F) Floor Flatness and F(L) Floor Levelness values when measured in accordance with ASTM E 1155/ASTM E 1155M. 1. F(F): Specified Overall Value (SOV) of 35; Minimum Localized Value (MLV) of 24. 2. F(L): Specified Overall Value (SOV) of 25; Minimum Localized Value (MLV) of 17. B. Screed elevated slabs level, maintaining the following minimum F(F) Floor Flatness and F(L) Floor Levelness values when measured in accordance with ASTM E 1155IASTM E 1155M. 1. F(F): Specified Overall Value (SOV) of 25; Minimum Localized Value (MLV) of 17. 2. F(L): Specified Overall Value (SOV) of 20; Minimum Localized Value (MLV) of 13. C. Correct the slab surface if tolerances are less than specified. D. Correct defects by grinding or by removal and replacement of the defective work. Areas requiring corrective work will be identified. Re -measure corrected areas by the same process. 3.07 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.1R, and as follows: 1. Surfaces to Receive Thin Floor Coverings: "Steel trowel" as described in ACI 302.1R; thin floor coverings include carpeting, resilient flooring, seamless flooring, thin set quarry tile, and thin set ceramic tile. 2, Other Surfaces to Be Left Exposed: Trowel as described in ACI 302.1R, minimizing burnish marks and other appearance defects. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 033000-48 SECTION 03 30 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE B. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains at 1:100 nominal. 3.08 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with requirements of ACI 308R. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete. C. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms: 1. Initial Curing: Start as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry. Keep continuously moist for not less than three days by water ponding, water -saturated sand, water - fog spray, or saturated burlap. a. Spraying: Spray water over floor slab areas and maintain wet. b. Saturated Burlap: Saturate burlap -polyethylene and place burlap -side down over floor slab areas, lapping ends and sides; maintain in place. 2. Final Curing: Begin after initial curing but before surface is dry. a. Moisture -Retaining Sheet: Lap strips not less than 3 inches and seal with waterproof tape or adhesive; secure at edges. b. Curing Compound: Apply in two coats at right angles, using application rate recommended by manufacturer. 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3.10 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements. B. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Arch itectJEng i neer. The cost of additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified. C. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Architect/Engineer for each individual area. 3.11 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected concrete floor surface until fully cured. 3.12 SCHEDULE - CONCRETE TYPES AND FINISHES Location A. Interior slab -on -grade Mix Type Concrete Finish A troweled END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 033000-49 SECTION 03 30 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 04 20 02 SINGLE-WYTHE UNIT MASONRY PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete masonry units. B. Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping: Firestopping at penetrations of masonry work. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 530I53O.11ERTA - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures and Related Commentaries; 2013. B. ASTM Al53IA153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009. C. ASTM A1O641A1O64M - Standard Specification for Carbon -Steel Wire and Welded Wire 'Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete; 2015, D. ASTM C129 - Standard Specification for Nonloadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; 2014a. E. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; current edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data for concrete masonry units and fabricated wire reinforcement. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent mechanical damage and contamination by other materials. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 40 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. B. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to maximum 90 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows: 1. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 x 8 inches and nominal depth of 8 inches. 2. Non-Loadbearing Units: ASTM C129. a. Hollow block, as indicated. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 042002-50 SECTION 04 20 02 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SINGLE-VVYTHE UNIT MASONRY b. Normal weight. 2.02 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss type; ASTM A10641A1064M steel wire, hot dip galvanized after fabrication to ASTM A1531A153M, Class B; 0.1483 inch side rods with 0.1483 inch cross rods; width as required to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 112 inch of mortar coverage on each exposure. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry. 3.02 COURSING A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. C. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Bond: Running. 2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches. 3. Mortar Joints: Concave. 3.03 PLACING AND BONDING A. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. B. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted. C. Remove excess mortar as work progresses. D. Interlock intersections and external corners, except for units laid in stack bond. E. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. F. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit comers or edges. 3.04 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches on center. B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening. C. Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls. D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. 3.05 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1116 inch. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 042002-51 SECTION 04 20 02 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SINGLE-WYTHE UNIT MASONRY B. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 114 inch in 10 ft and 112 inch in 20 ft or more. C. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 114 inch per story non -cumulative; 112 inch in two stories or more. D. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 118 inch in 3 ft and 114 inch in 10 ft; 112 inch in 30 ft. E. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: Head joint, minus 114 inch, plus 318 inch. F. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Wails: 114 inch. 3.06 CLEANING A. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses. B. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 042002-52 SECTION 04 20 02 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SINGLE-WYTHE UNIT MASONRY SECTION 0610 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A, Fire retardant treated wood materials. B. Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports. 1,02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009. B. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; 2012, C. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; 2010. D. WWPA G-5 - Western Lumber Grading Rules; 2011. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General. Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent deformation and to allow air circulation, B. Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Prevent exposure to precipitation during shipping, storage, or installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies. 1. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the specified requirements. 2. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standard Committee (www,alsc.org) and who provides grading service for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated. B. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. 2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER A. Grading Agency: Western Wood Products Association; WWPA G-5. B. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S. C. Moisture Content: S -dry or MC19. D. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring; 1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade, 2. Boards: Standard or No. 3. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 061000-53 SECTION 06 10 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; AN Rights Reserved ROUGH CARPENTRY 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Metal and Finish: Hot -dipped galvanized steel complying with ASTM A1531A153M for high humidity and preservative -treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. 2.04 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1- Use Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications. 1. Fire -Retardant Treated Wood; Mark each piece of wood with producer's stamp indicating compliance with specified requirements. B. Fire Retardant Treatment; 1. Interior Type A: AWPA Use Category UCFA, Commodity Specification H (Treatment C20 for lumber and C27 for plywood), low temperature (low hygroscopic) type, chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread rating of 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant combustion when test is extended for an additional 20 minutes. a. Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and 15 percent for plywood. b. Treat rough carpentry items as scheduled. c. Do not use treated wood in applications exposed to weather or where the wood may become wet. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION • GENERAL A. Select material sizes to minimize waste. B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking. C. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants. 3.02 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. B. In framed assemblies that have concealed spaces, provide solid wood fireblocking as required by applicable local code, to close concealed draft openings between floors and between top story and roof/attic space; other material acceptable to code authorities may be used in lieu of solid wood blocking. C. In metal stud walls, provide continuous blocking around door and window openings for anchorage of frames, securely attached to stud framing. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 061000-54 SECTION 0610 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ROUGH CARPENTRY D. In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall -mounted items, unless item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support is explicitly indicated. E. Where ceiling -mounting is indicated, provide blocking and supplementary supports above ceiling, unless other method of support is explicitly indicated. F. Provide the following specific non-structural framing and blocking: 1. Cabinets and shelf supports. 2. Wall brackets. 3. Handrails. 4. Grab bars. 5. Towel and bath accessories. 8. Wall -mounted door stops. 7. Chalkboards and marker boards. 8. Wail paneling and trim. 9. Joints of rigid wall coverings that occur between studs. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Framing Members: 114 inch from true position, maximum. B. Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 114 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 114 inch in 30 feet maximum. 3.04 SCHEDULES A. Blocking in Gypsum Board Walls: Fire retardant treated. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 06 1000-55 SECTION 0610 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ROUGH CARPENTRY SECTION 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Firestopping materials. B. Firestopping of all penetrations of and joints in fire rated assemblies, whether indicated on drawings or not, and other openings indicated. C. Smoke -stopping of all penetrations of and joints in smoke partitions, whether indicated on drawings or not, and otheropenings indicated. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum wallboard fireproofing. 1,03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials; 2015, B. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through -Penetration Fire Stops; 2013a. C. ASTM E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire Resistive Joint Systems; 2007 (Reapproved 2011). D. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; current edition. E. FM 4991 - Approval Standard for Firestop Contractors; 2013. F. FM (AG) - FM Approval Guide; current edition. G. UL 2079 - Standard for Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. H. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; current edition. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Assembly: Particular arrangement of materials specific to given type of construction described or detailed in referenced documents. B. Barriers: Time rated fire walls, smoke barrier walls, time rated ceiling/floor assemblies and structural floors. C. Firestopping: Methods and materials applied in penetrations and unprotected openings to limit spread of heat, fire gasses and smoke. D. Penetration: Opening or foreign material passing through or into barrier or structural floor such that full thickness of rated materials is not obtained. E. Joint: Interruption to a fire -rated assembly occurring at interface between 1) adjacent sections of wall, 2) intersecting walls, 3) top of wall and ceiling, structural floor or roof deck, 4) wall and edge of structural floor, 5) adjacent sections of structural floor. F. System: Specific products and applications, classified and numbered by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. to close specific barrier penetrations and joints. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 078400-56 SECTION 07 84 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved FIRESTOPPING G. Sleeve: Metal fabrication or pipe section extending through thickness of barrier and used to permanently guard penetration. Sleeves are described as part of penetrating system in other sections and may or may not be required. 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: 1. Fire -rated construction: Maintain barrier and structural floor fire resistance ratings including resistance to cold smoke at all penetrations, connections with other surfaces or types of construction, at separations required to permit building movement and sound or vibration absorption, and at other construction gaps. 2. Smoke barrier construction: Maintain barrier and structural floor resistance to cold smoke at all penetrations, connections with other surfaces and types of construction and at all separations required to permit building movement and sound or vibration absorption, and at other construction gaps. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Schedule of Firestopping: List each type of penetration, fire rating of the penetrated assembly, and firestopping test or design number. 1. Provide manufacturer's qualified engineering judgements for non-standard applications. C. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance ratings, and limitations. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation instructions. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Testing: Provide firestopping assemblies of designs that provide the scheduled fire ratings when tested in accordance with methods indicated. 1. Listing in UL (FRD), FM (AG), or ITS (DIR) will be considered as constituting an acceptable test report. 2. Submission of actual test reports is required for assemblies for which none of the above substantiation exists. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section and: 1. Approved by Factory Mutual Research Corporation under FM 4991, or meeting any two of the following requirements:. 2. With minimum 3 years documented experience installing work of this type. 3. Able to show at least 5 satisfactorily completed projects of comparable size and type. 4. Licensed by authority having jurisdiction. 5. Approved by firestopping manufacturer. 1,08 MOCK-UP A. Install one firestopping assembly representative of each fire rating design required on project. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 07 B4 00 - 57 SECTION 07 84 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved FIRESTOPPING 1. Where one design may be used for different penetrating items or in different wall constructions, install one assembly for each different combination. B. Obtain approval of authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ) before proceeding. C. If accepted, mock-up will represent minimum standard for the Work. D. If accepted, mock-up may remain as part of the Work. Remove and replace mock-ups not accepted. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in original, unopened packaging with legible manufacturer's identification. B. Coordinate delivery with scheduled installation date to minimize storage time at site. C. Store materials in a clean, dry, ventilated location. Protect materials from freezing if required by manufacturer. 1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with firestopping manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and conditions during and after installation. Maintain minimum temperature before, during, and for 3 days after installation of materials. B. Provide ventilation in areas where solvent -cured materials are being installed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRESTOPPING ASSEMBLIES A. Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements. 1. Fire Ratings: Use any system that is listed by FM (AG), ITS (DIR), or UL (FRD) and tested in accordance with ASTM E814 or ASTM E119 with F Rating equal to fire rating of penetrated assembly and minimum T Rating Equal to F Rating and in compliance with other specified requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Acceptable Manufacturers. As listed in UL (FRD) for specific UL Design Number. B. Fill, Void or Cavity Materials: Conform to UL (FRD) - XHHW. C. Firestop Devices: Conform to UL (FRD) - XHJI. D. Forming Materials: Conform to UL (FRD) - XHKU. E. Mechanical Joint Assemblies: Conform to UL (FRD) - XHLP. F. Packing Material; As required by specific UL Design Number forjoint system or through - penetration firestop system. G. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Type required for tested assembly design. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 078400-58 SECTION 07 84 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved FIRESTOPPING PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section. 1. Verify barrier joints and penetrations are properly sized and in suitable condition for application of materials. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter that could adversely affect bond of firestopping material. B. Remove incompatible materials that could adversely affect bond. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in manner described in UL (FRD) or fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, completely closing openings. B. Do not cover installed firestopping until inspected by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Install labeling required by code. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation, B. Patch or replace firestopping damaged by work of other sections. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 078400-59 SECTION 07 84 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved FIRESTOPPING SECTION 07 90 05 JOINT SEALERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Expansion joint sealers. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping: Firestopping sealants. B. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustic sealant. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014, B. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2013, C. SCAQMD 1168 -South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate the work with other sections referencing this section. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, C. Samples: Submit one samples, 2 inch in size illustrating sealant colors for selection. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum 5 years experience. B, Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience and approved by manufacturer. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 0178 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion, C. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 079005-60 SECTION 07 90 05 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved JOINT SEALERS PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 JOINT SEALANTS A. Sealants and Primers - General: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No. 1168, B. Type S-1 - Acrylic Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 12-112, Uses NT, M, A, 0; single component, solvent curing, non -staining, non-bleeding, non -sagging. 1. Color: Match adjacent finished surfaces. 2. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 12-112 percent. C. Type S-3 - Nonsag Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, 1, M, A, G, 0; single component, chemical curing, non -staining, non bleeding, non -sagging type. 1. Color: Match adjacent finished surfaces. 2. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent. D. Type S4 - Self -Leveling Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade P, Class 25 minimum; Uses T, I, M, A, 0; single component, chemical curing, non staining, non bleeding, capable of continuous water immersion, self -leveling type. 1. Calor: Gray. 2. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent. 3. Service Temperature Range: 40 to 180 degrees F. 4. Shore A Hardness Range: 20 to 35. E. Type S-5 - Self -leveling or Non -sag Silicone Sealant: ASTM D5893, Type S, Grade NS or P, Class 100150 minimum; Uses T, A, G, M, 0; single component, neutral curing, non-bleeding. 1. Color: To be selected by Arch itectlEngineer from manufacturer's standard range. 2. Movement Capability: Plus 100 percent, minus 50 percent. F. Type S-6 - Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 25 minimum; Uses NT, A, G, M, 0; single component, neutral curing, non -sagging, non -staining, fungus resistant, non-bleeding. 1. Color: Clear. 2. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent. G. Type S-7 - Nonsag Silyl-terminated Polyether Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 25 minimum, Uses NT, A, G, M, 0; single component, non -sagging, non -staining, non-bleeding. 1. Cure Type: Neutral. 2. Color: Match adjacent finished surfaces. 3. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 50 percent. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. B, Joint Cleaner: Non -corrosive and non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. C. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 079005-61 SECTION 07 90 05 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved JOINT SEALERS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant. B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193. D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions. B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193. C. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width -to -depth ratio, neck dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer, except where specific dimensions are indicated. D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. E. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. F. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. G. Tool joints concave. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Protect sealants until cured. 3.06 SCHEDULE A. Control and Expansion Joints in Paving: Type S-4. B. Control, Expansion, and Soft Joints in Masonry, and Between Masonry and Adjacent Work: Type S-3, S-5 or S-7. C. Interior Joints for Which No Other Sealant is Indicated: Type S-1; . D. Control and Expansion Joints in Interior Concrete Slabs and Floors: Type S4. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 079005-62 SECTION 07 90 05 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved JOINT SEALERS E. Joints Between Plumbing Fixtures and Walls and Floors, and Between Countertops and Walls: Type S-6. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 079005-63 SECTION 07 90 05 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved JOINT SEALERS SECTION 08 3100 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall access door and frame units. B. Schedule of additional doors to be provided beyond those shown on the Drawings. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Openings in partitions and drywall ceilings. B. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Field paint finish. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide sizes, types, finishes, hardware, scheduled locations, and details of adjoining work. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate exact position of all access door units. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation requirements, E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of all access units. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCESS DOOR AND PANEL APPLICATIONS A. Walls, Unless Otherwise Indicated: 1. Material: Steel. a. Walls in Wet Areas: Steel, hot -dipped zinc or zinc -aluminum -alloy coated. 2. Size: 16 x 16 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Standard duty, hinged door. 4. Tool -operated spring or cam lock; no handle. 5. In Gypsum Board: Drywall bead frame with door surface recessed for infill with wall finish. 2.02 WALL AND CEILING UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Access Panel Solutions, Inc: www.accesspanelsolutions.com. 2. Acudor Products Inc: www.acudor.com. 3. Babcock -Davis: www.babcockdavis.com. 4. Cendrex, Inc: www.cendrex.com. 5. Karp Associates, Inc: www.karpinc.com. 6. Milcor by Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc: www.milcorinc.com. B. Access Doors: Factory fabricated door and frame units, fully assembled units with corner joints welded, filled, and ground flush; square and without rack or warp; coordinate requirements with assemblies units are to be installed in. 1, Style: Recessed door panel for infill with wall/ceiling finish. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 083100-64 SECTION 08 3100 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS 2. Door Style: Single thickness with rolled or turned in edges. 3. Frames: 16 gage, 0.0598 inch, minimum. 4. Heavy Duty Frames: 14 gage, 0.0747 inch, minimum. 5. Single Thickness Steel Door Panels: 0.070 inch, minimum. 6. Steel Finish: Primed. 7. Primed Finish: Polyester powder coat; manufacturer's standard color. 8. Hardware: a. Hinges for Non -Fire -Rated Units: Concealed, constant force closure spring type. b. Latch/Lock: Screw driver slot for quarter turn cam latch. c. Gasketing: Extruded neoprene, around the perimeter of the door panel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that rough openings are correctly sized and located. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install frames plumb and level in openings. Secure rigidly in place. C. Position units to provide convenient access to the concealed work requiring access. 3.03 SCHEDULE A. Provide four (4) wall access doors to be located in field as directed by Architect/Engineer. END OF SECTION PROJECT N0, 17-210-1103 083100-65 SECTION 08 3100 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS SECTION 09 05 61 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section applies to all floors identified in the contract documents as to receive the following types of floor coverings: 1. Thin -set ceramic tile and stone tile. B. Removal of existing floor coverings. C. Preparation of existing concrete floor slabs for installation of floor coverings. D. Testing of concrete floor slabs for moisture and alkalinity (pH). E. Remediation of concrete floor slabs due to unsatisfactory moisture or alkalinity (pH) conditions. Include in the Base Bid all specified testing and remediation of concrete floor slabs; expect that floor slabs will fail moisture and alkalinity tests. If remediation is not required, as determined by testing agency's report, a contract modification will be issued to remove the cost of such remediation from the Contract. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Limitations on curing requirements for new concrete floor slabs. 1.03 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Include in the Base Bid and list as a separate line item in the Contractor's Schedule of Values the cost of moisture and alkalinity testing and the cost of moisture and alkalinity remediation of concrete slabs as specified in this Section. 1.04 REFERENCES A. ASTM C109/C109M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2 -in. or (50 -mm) Cube Specimens); 2013. B. ASTM 0472 - Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum, Gypsum Plasters and Gypsum Concrete; 1999 (Reapproved 2014). C. ASTM F710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring; 2011. D. ASTM F1869 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride; 2011, E. RFCI (RWP) - Recommended Work Practices for Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings; Resilient Floor Covering Institute; October 2011. 1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate scheduling of cleaning and testing, so that preliminary cleaning has been completed for at least 24 hours prior to testing. PROJECT N0, 17-210-1103 090561-66 SECTION 09 05 61 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Visual Observation Report: For existing floor coverings to be removed. B. Floor Covering and Adhesive Manufacturers' Product Literature: For each specific combination of substrate, floor covering, and adhesive to be used; showing: 1. Moisture and alkalinity (pH) limits and test methods. 2. Manufacturer's required bond/compatibility test procedure. C. Testing Agency's Report: 1. Description of areas tested; include floor plans and photographs if helpful. 2. Summary of conditions encountered. 3. Moisture and alkalinity (pH) test reports. 4. Copies of specified test methods. 5. Recommendations for remediation of unsatisfactory surfaces. 6. Submit report to Arch itect/Engineer. 7. Submit report not more than two business days after conclusion of testing. D. Adhesive Bond and Compatibility Test Report. E. Copy of RFCI (RWP). 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Moisture and alkalinity (pH) testing shall be performed by an independent testing agency employed and paid by Contractor. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent testing agency experienced in the types of testing specified. 1. Submit evidence of experience consisting of at least 3 test reports of the type required, with project Owner's project contact information. C. Contractor's Responsibility Relating to Independent Agency Testing: 1. Provide access for and cooperate with testing agency. 2. Confirm date of start of testing at least 10 days prior to actual start. 3. Allow at least 4 business days on site for testing agency activities. 4. Achieve and maintain specified ambient conditions. 5. Notify Architect/Engineer when specified ambient conditions have been achieved and when testing will start. D. Remedial Coating Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this section, trained by or employed by coating manufacturer, and able to provide at least 3 project references showing at least 3 years' experience installing moisture emission coatings. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, handle, and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. B. Deliver materials in manufacturer's packaging, include installation instructions. C. Keep materials from freezing. PROJECT NO, 17-210-1103 09 05 61 -67 SECTION 09 05 61 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION 1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperature in spaces where concrete testing is being performed, and for at least 48 hours prior to testing, at not less than 65 degrees F or more than 85 degrees F. B. Maintain relative humidity in spaces where concrete testing is being performed, and for at least 48 hours prior to testing, at not less than 40 percent and not more than 60 percent. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Patching Compound: Floor covering manufacturer's recommended product, suitable for conditions, and compatible with adhesive and floor covering. In the absence of any recommendation from flooring manufacturer, provide a product with the following characteristics: 1. Cementitious moisture-, mildew-, and alkali -resistant compound, compatible with floor, floor covering, and floor covering adhesive, and capable of being feathered to nothing at edges. 2. Compressive Strength: 3000 psi, minimum, after 28 days, when tested in accordance with ASTM C1091C109M or ASTM C472, whichever is appropriate. B. Alternate Flooring Adhesive: Floor covering manufacturer's recommended product, suitable for the moisture and pH conditions present; low-VOC. In the absence of any recommendation from flooring manufacturer, provide a product recommended by adhesive manufacturer as suitable for substrate and floor covering and for conditions present. C. Remedial Floor Coating: Single- or multi -layer coating or coating/overlay combination intended by its manufacturer to resist water vapor transmission to degree sufficient to meet flooring manufacturer's emission limits, resistant to the level of alkalinity (pH) found, and suitable for adhesion of flooring without further treatment. 1. If testing agency recommends any particular products, use one of those. 2. Products: a. ARDEX Engineered Cements; ARDEX MC ULTRA with ARDEX FEATHERFINISH: www.ardexamericas.com. b. Custom Building Products; TechMVC Moisture Vapor and Alkalinity Barrier: www,custombuildingproducts.com. c. LATICRETE Intemational, Inc; LATICRETE NXT Vapor Reduction Coating with LATICRETE NXT Level Plus: www.laticrete.com. d. Sika Corporation; Sikafloor Moisture Tolerance Epoxy Primer and Sikafloor Self -Leveling Moisture Tolerant Resurfacer: www.sikafloorusa.com. e. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONCRETE SLAB PREPARATION A. Follow recommendations of testing agency. B, Perform following operations in the order indicated: 1. Preliminary cleaning. 2. Moisture vapor emission tests; 3 tests in the first 1000 square feet and one test in each additional 1000 square feet, unless otherwise indicated or required by flooring manufacturer. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 09 05 61 -68 SECTION 09 05 61 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION 3. Internal relative humidity tests; in same locations as moisture vapor emission tests, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Alkalinity (pH) tests; in same locations as moisture vapor emission tests, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Specified remediation, if required. 6. Patching, smoothing, and leveling, as required. 7. Other preparation specified. 8. Adhesive bond and compatibility test. 9. Protection. C. Remediations: 1. Active Water Leaks or Continuing Moisture Migration to Surface of Slab: Correct this condition before doing any other remediation; re -test after correction. 2. Excessive Moisture Emission or Relative Humidity: If an adhesive that is resistant to the level of moisture present is available and acceptable to flooring manufacturer, use that adhesive for installation of the flooring; if not, apply remedial floor coating over entire suspect floor area. 3. Excessive Alkalinity (pH): If remedial floor coating is necessary to address excessive moisture, no additional remediation is required; if not, if an adhesive that is resistant to the level present is available and acceptable to the flooring manufacturer, use that adhesive for installation of the flooring; otherwise, apply a skim coat of specified patching compound over entire suspect floor area. 3.02 REMOVAL OF EXISTING FLOOR COVERINGS A. Comply with local, State, and federal regulations and recommendations of RFCI Recommended Work Practices for Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings, as applicable to floor covering being removed. B. Dispose of removed materials in accordance with local, State, and federal regulations and as specified. 3.03 PRELIMINARY CLEANING A. Clean floors of dust, solvents, paint, wax, oil, grease, asphalt, residual adhesive, adhesive removers, film -forming curing compounds, sealing compounds, alkaline salts, excessive laitance, mold, mildew, and other materials that might prevent adhesive bond. B. Do not use solvents or other chemicals for cleaning. 3.04 MOISTURE VAPOR EMISSION TESTING A. Where the floor covering manufacturer's requirements conflict with either the referenced test method or this specification, comply with the manufacturer's requirements. B. Where this specification conflicts with the referenced test method, comply with the requirements of this section. C. Test in accordance with ASTM F1869 and as follows. D. Plastic sheet test and mat bond test may not be substituted for the specified ASTM test method, as those methods do not quantify the moisture content sufficiently. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 09 05 61 -69 SECTION 09 05 61 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION E. In the event that test values exceed floor covering manufacturer's limits, perform remediation as indicated. In the absence of manufacturer limits, perform remediation if test values exceed 3 pounds per 1000 square feet per 24 hours. F. Report: Report the information required by the test method. 3.05 ALKALINITY TESTING A. Where the floor covering manufacturer's requirements conflict with either the referenced test method or this specification, comply with the manufacturer's requirements. B. The following procedure is the equivalent of that described in ASTM F710, repeated here for the Contractor's convenience. C. Use a wide range alkalinity (pH) test paper, its associated chart, and distilled or deionized water, D. Place several drops of water on a clean surface of concrete, forming a puddle approximately 1 inch in diameter. Allow the puddle to set for approximately 60 seconds, then dip the alkalinity (pH) test paper into the water, remove it, and compare immediately to chart to determine alkalinity (pH) reading. E. In the event that test values exceed floor covering manufacturer's limits, perform remediation as indicated. In the absence of manufacturer limits, perform remediation if alkalinity (pH) test value is over 10. 3.06 PREPARATION A. See individual floor covering section(s) for additional requirements. B. Comply with recommendations of testing agency. C. Comply with requirements and recommendations of floor covering manufacturer. D. Fill and smooth surface cracks, grooves, depressions, control joints and other non-moving joints, and other irregularities with patching compound. E. Do not fill expansion joints, isolation joints, or other moving joints. 3.07 ADHESIVE BOND AND COMPATIBILITY TESTING A. Comply with requirements and recommendations of floor covering manufacturer. 3.08 APPLICATION OF REMEDIAL FLOOR COATING A. Comply with requirements and recommendations of coating manufacturer. 3.09 PROTECTION A. Cover prepared floors with building paper or other durable covering. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 09 05 61 -70 SECTION 09 05 61 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION SECTION 09 2116 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Acoustic insulation. B. Gypsum wallboard. C. Joint treatment and accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution requirements. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A108.11 - American National Standard for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units; 2010 (Revised). B. ANSI A118.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Test Methods and Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010). C. ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board; 2015. D. ASTM C557 - Standard Specification for Adhesives for Fastening Gypsum Wallboard to Wood Framing; 2003 (Reapproved 2009). E. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral -Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2012. F. ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2013. G. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self -Piercing Tapping Screws for Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2014. H. ASTM C1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories For Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base; 2014a. I. ASTM C1325 - Specification for Non -Asbestos Fiber -Mat Reinforced Cementitious Backer Units; 2014. J. ASTM C13961C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2014. K. ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2012, L. GA -216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2013. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate special details associated with fireproofing and acoustic seals. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 092116-71 SECTION 09 2116 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES C. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, accessories, and joint finishing system. D. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on partition head to structure connectors, showing compliance with requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board application and finishing, with minimum 5 years of documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA -216. 1. See PART 3 for finishing requirements. 2.02 BOARD MATERIALS A. Manufacturers - Gypsum -Based Board: 1. American Gypsum: www.americangypsum.com. 2. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. 3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum: www.gpgypsum.com, 4. Lafarge North America Inc: www.fafargenorthamerica.com. 5. National Gypsum Company: www,nationaigypsum.com, 6. USG Corporation: www.usg.com, 7. Substitutions: Not permitted. B. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper -faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C13961C1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273. a. Mold -resistant board is required whenever board is being installed before the building is both 1) enclosed and 2) conditioned. 3. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire -Rating: Use type required by indicated tested assembly; if no tested assembly is indicated, use Type X board, UL or WH listed. 4. Thickness: a. Vertical Surfaces: 518 inch. b. Ceilings: 518 inch. 5. Mold -Resistant Paper -Faced Products: a. American Gypsum; M -Bloc. b. American Gypsum; M -Bloc Type X. c. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock Mold -Guard. d. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock Fireguard X Mold -Guard. e. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond XP Gypsum Board . I, Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. C. Backing Board For Wet Areas: One of the following products: 1. Application: Surfaces behind tile in all areas, including Shower Enclosures, 2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 0921 16-72 SECTION 09 21 16 Copyright 2017 by KLU6ER, INC.: All Rights Reserved GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 3. ANSI Cement -Based Board: Non -gypsum -based; aggregated Portland cement panels with glass fiber mesh embedded in front and back surfaces complying with ANSI A118.9 or ASTM C 1325. a. Thickness: 112 inch. b. Products: 1) Custom Building Products: www. custombuildingproducts, com. 2) National Gypsum Company; PermaBase Cement Board: www.nationaigypsum.com. 3) USG Corporation: www.usg.com. 4) Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. D. Backing Board For Non -Wet Areas: Water-resistant gypsum backing board as defined in ASTM C13961C1396M; sizes to minimum joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Vertical surfaces behind thinset tile, except in wet areas. 2. Moisture Resistance: Less than 5% water absorption. 3. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273, 4. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire -Rating: Use type required by indicated tested assembly; if no tested assembly is indicated, use Type X board, UL or WH listed. 5. Type: Type X, in locations indicated. 6. Type X Thickness: 518 inch. 7. Edges: Tapered. 8. Products: a. American Gypsum; M -Bloc. b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensArmor Plus. c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond XP Gypsum Board. d. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2.03 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED BOARD MATERIALS A. Cementitious Backer Board: ANSI A118.9, aggregated portland cement panels with glass fiber mesh embedded in front and back surfaces, 112 inch thick. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, unfaced. Thickness: 3.5 inch. B. Acoustic Insulation: 1; preformed glass fiber, friction ft type, unfaced. Thickness: 3 inch. C. Acoustic Sealant: Non -hardening, non -skinning, for use in conjunction with gypsum board. D. Finishing Accessories: ASTM C1047, galvanized steel or rolled zinc, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Types: As detailed or required for finished appearance. 2. Special Shapes: In addition to conventional cornerbead and control joints, provide U -bead at exposed panel edges. 3. Manufacturers - Finishing Accessories: a. Same manufacturer as framing materials. E. Joint Materials: ASTM C475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions. 1. Tape: 2 inch wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Ready -mixed vinyl -based joint compound. PROJECT NO, 17-210-1103 092116-73 SECTION 09 2116 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES F. Screws for Attachment to Wood Members, and to Gypsum Board: ASTM C1002; self -piercing tapping type; cadmium -plated for exterior locations. G. Adhesive for Attachment to Wood: ASTM C557. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence. 3.02 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A. Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. B. Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Place two beads continuously on substrate before installation of perimeter framing members. 2. Place continuous bead at perimeter of each layer of gypsum board. 3. In non -fire -rated construction, seal around all penetrations by conduit, pipe, ducts, rough -in boxes, and other membrane penetrations of gypsum board. 3.03 BOARD INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C 840 and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in highly visible locations. B. Single -Layer Non -Rated: Install gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. 1. Exception: Tapered edges to receive joint treatment at right angles to framing. C. Fire -Rated Construction: Install gypsum board in strict compliance with requirements of assembly listing. D. Cementitious Backing Board: Install over steel framing members, in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's instructions. E. Installation on Metal Framing: Use screws for attachment of gypsum board except face layer of non -rated double -layer assemblies, which may be installed by means of adhesive lamination. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated. 1. Not more than 30 feet apart on walls and ceilings over 50 feet long. B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths. C. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials and as indicated. 3.05 JOINT TREATMENT A. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows: 1. Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish or wall coverings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Level 3: Walls to receive tile finish. 3. Level 1: Wall areas above finished ceilings not exposed to view, whether or not accessible in the completed construction. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 092116-74 SECTION 09 21 16 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES B. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. 1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1132 inch. 2. Taping, filling and sanding is not required at base layer of double layer applications. C. Fill and finish joints and corners of cementitious backing board as recommended by manufacturer. 3.06 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 118 inch in 10 feet in any direction. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 092116-75 SECTION 09 21 16 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC,; All Rights Reserved GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES SECTION 09 30 00 TILING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Tile for floor applications. B. Tile for wall applications. C. Ceramic accessories. D. Ceramic trim. E. Non -ceramic trim. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers. B. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Installation of tile backer board. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A1081A1181A136.1 - American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile (Compendium); 2013.1. B. ANSI A108.1a - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet -Set Method, with Portland Cement Mortar; 2014. C. ANSI A108.1 b - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry -Set or Latex -Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010). D. ANSI A108.1c -Specifications for Contractors Option; Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet -Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Bed with Dry -Set or Latex -Portland Cement; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010). E. ANSI A108.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Organic Adhesives or Water Cleanable Tile -Setting Epoxy Adhesive; 2009 (Revised). F. ANSI A108.5 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry - Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex -Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010). G. ANSI A108.6 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile -Setting and -Grouting Epoxy; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010). H. ANSI A108.8 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant Furan Resin Mortar and Grout; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010). 1. ANSI A108.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010). J. ANSI A108.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010). PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 093000-76 SECTION 09 30 00 Copyright 2017 by KLU BER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TILING K. ANSI A10&11 - American National Standard for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units; 2010 (Revised). L. ANSI A108.12 -American National Standard for Installation of Ceramic Tile with EGP (Exterior Glue Plywood) Latex -Portland Cement Mortar;1999 (Reaffirmed 2010). M. ANSI A108.13 -American National Standard for Installation of Load Bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for Thin -Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone; 2005 (Reaffirmed 2010). N. ANSI A118.3 - American National Standard Specifications for Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile -Setting and -Grouting Epoxy and Water Cleanable Tile -Setting Epoxy Adhesive; 2013 (Revised). 0. ANSI A118.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Modified Dry -Set Cement Mortar; 2012 (Revised). P. ANSI A118.7 - American National Standard Specifications for High Performance Cement Grouts for Tile Installation; 2010 (Revised). Q. ANSI A118.12 - American National Standard Specifications for Crack Isolation Membranes for Thin -set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone Installation; 2014. R. ANSI A137.1 - American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile; 2013.1. S. ASTM F710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring; 2011, T. ASTM F1869 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride; 2011. U. TCNA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation; 2015, 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers' data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, and accessories. Include instructions for using grouts and adhesives. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate tile layout, patterns, color arrangement, perimeter conditions, junctions with dissimilar materials, control and expansion joints, thresholds, ceramic accessories, and setting details. D. Samples for Verification: Mount selected tile and apply grout on two plywood panels, minimum 18 x 18 inches in size illustrating pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements, F. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, stain removal methods, and polishes and waxes. G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 093000-77 SECTION 09 30 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TILING 1. See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Tile: 10 square feet of each size, color, and surface finish combination. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain one copy of and ANSI Al081A1181A136.1 and TCNA (HB) on site. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products specified in this section, with minimum 5 years of documented experience. C. Installer Qualifications; Company specializing in performing tile installation, with minimum of 5 years of documented experience. 1.07 MOCK-UP A. Construct tile mock-up where directed in field, incorporating all components specified for the location. 1. Minimum size of mock-up is indicated on the drawings. 2. Approved mock-up may remain as part of the Work. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install solvent -based products in an unventilated environment. B. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F during installation of mortar materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TILE - FURNISHED BY OWNER, INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR A. Manufacturers: 1. American Olean Corporation: www.americanolean.com. 2. Crossville Inc.: www.crossvilleinc.com.. 3. Substitutions: Not permitted. B. Glazed Wall Tile Type CWTA: ANSI A137.1, and as follows: 1. Rapport Series manufactured by American Olean Corporation . 2. Moisture Absorption: 0 to 0.5 percent. 3. Size and Shape: 12 x 24 rectilinear. 4. Thickness: 318 inch. 5. Edges: Square. 6. Surface Finish; Matte glaze. 7. Color(s): As shown on the drawings. 8. Trim Units (Type CBTA): Matching cove base shapes in sizes indicated on drawings . C. Ceramic Mosaic Glass & Stone Accent Tile Type CWTB: ANSI A137.1, and as follows: 1. Mini Roman Mosaics With Stone (Square Patterns); Product X1305 -P6 to match existing manufactured by American Olean Corporation . 2. Size and Shape: Combination of 1 inch and 2 inch squares and 1 x 2 inch rectangles. 3. Edges: Cushioned, PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 093000-78 SECTION 09 30 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TILING 4. Color(s): Beige Mix. 5. Trim Units: Matching 4" wide accent tile shapes in height shown on the drawings. D. Porcelain Floor Tile Type CFTA: ANSI A137.1, and as follows: 1. Wood Impressions manufactured by Crossville Inc. . 2. Moisture Absorption: 0 to 0.5 percent. 3. Size and Shape: 6 x 18 inch woodgrain plank. 4. Thickness: 7116 inch. 5. Face: Textured. 6. Edges: Slight Bevel, 7. Surface Finish: Matte glazed. 8. Color(s): Gunstock #AV194. 2.02 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES - FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR A. Ceramic Accessories: Glazed finish, same color and finish as adjacent field tile; same manufacturer as tile. B. Non -Ceramic Trim: Satin natural anodized extruded aluminum, style and dimensions to suit application, for setting using the mortar or adhesive. 1. Applications; Use in the following locations: a. Open edges of wall tile. b. Open edges of floor tile. c. Wall corners, outside. 2. Manufacturer: a. Schluter -Systems: www.schluter.com - Radius Profiles. b. Genesis APS International: www.genesis-aps.com - Radius Profiles. c. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2.03 SETTING MATERIALS - FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR A. Provide setting materials made by the same manufacturer as grout. B. Latex -Portland Cement Mortar Bond Coat: ANSI All 18.4. 1. Application(s): Use this type of bond coat where indicated and where no other type of bond coat is indicated. 2.04 ADHESIVE MATERIALS - FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR A. Manufacturers: 1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com. 2. Mapei Corporation: www.mapei.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2.05 MORTAR MATERIALS - FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR A. Manufacturers: 1. Laticrete Inc.: www,laticrete.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. B. Mortar Bond Coat Materials: PROJECT N0, 17-210-1103 093000-79 SECTION 09 30 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TILING 2.06 GROUTS - FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR A. Manufacturers: 1. Laticrete Inc.: 2. Substitutions: www.laticrete.com. Not permitted. B. Polymer Modified Grout: ANSI A118.7 polymer modified cement grout. 1. Applications: Use this type of grout where indicated for wall tile applications. 2. Use sanded grout for joints 118 inch wide and larger; use unsanded grout for joints less than 118 inch wide. 3. Color(s): As scheduled. C. Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3 chemical resistant and water -cleanable epoxy grout. 1. Applications: Use this type of grout where indicated for floor tile and wall base applications. 2. Color(s): As scheduled. 2.07 ACCESSORY MATERIALS - FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR A. Underlayment Membrane at Floors: Specifically designed for bonding to thin -set setting mortar; not primarily a waterproofing material and having the following characteristics: 1. Crack Resistance: No failure at 1/16 inch gap, minimum; comply with ANSI A118.12. 2. Uncoupling Function: Allow for separation between membrane and the mortar adhering tile to the membrane when subjected to excessive substrate movement. 3. Suitable for installation over green concrete. 4. Do Not Use: Gypsum or cementitious based self -leveling underlayment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that sub -floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive tile. B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust -free, and are ready to receive tile. C. Verify that sub -floor surfaces are dust -free and free of substances that could impair bonding of setting materials to sub -floor surfaces. D. Verify that concrete sub -floor surfaces are ready for tile installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within the following limits: 1. Moisture Emission Rate: Not greater than 3 lb per 1000 sq ft per 24 hours, test in accordance with ASTM F1869. 2. Alkalinity (pH): Verify pH range of 5 to 9, test in accordance with ASTM F71O. E. Verify that required floor -mounted utilities are in correct location. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protect surrounding work from damage. B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 093000-80 SECTION 09 30 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TILING C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances. 3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Install tile and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1a thru A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and TCNA (HB) recommendations. B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. C. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases neatly. Align floor joints. D. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make grout joints without voids, cracks, excess mortar or excess grout, or too little grout. E. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed. F. Install non -ceramic trim in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. G. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. H. Keep control joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints. I. Prior to grouting, allow installation to completely cure; minimum of 48 hours. J. Grout tile joints. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated. K. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes. 3.04 INSTALLATION - FLOORS - THIN -SET METHODS A. Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method F113, dry -set or latex -Portland cement bond coat, with standard grout, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use underlayment membrane under all the unless other underlayment is indicated. 3.05 INSTALLATION - WALL TILE A. Over gypsum wallboard on wood studs install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method W243, thin - set with dry -set or latex -Portland cement bond coat, unless otherwise indicated. 3.06 CLEANING A. Clean tile and grout surfaces. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 093000-81 SECTION 09 30 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TILING SECTION 09 5100 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system. B. Acoustical units. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 21 13 00 - Fire Suppression Sprinklers: Sprinkler heads in ceiling system. B. Section 23 37 00 - Air Outlets and Inlets: Air diffusion devices in ceiling. C. Section 26 5100 - Lighting: Light fixtures in ceiling system. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C635IC635M - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceilings; 2O13a. B. ASTM C63610636M - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panels; 2013. C. ASTM E5801E580M - Standard Practice for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panels in Areas Subject to Earthquake Ground Motions; 2014. D. ASTM E1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products; 2014. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved. B. Do not install acoustical units until after interior wet work is dry. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components. C. Samples: Submit two samples 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating material and finish of acoustical units. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Acoustical Units: Quantity equal to 5 percent of total installed. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and maximum humidity of 40 percent prior to, during, and after acoustical unit installation. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 095100-82 SECTION 09 5100 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acoustic Panels (Basis of Design): 1. Type ACTA: USG; Eclipse Clima Plus, Beveled Tegular #76775 - SLT: www.usg.com, B. Suspension Systems: 1. Chicago Metallic Corporation: www.chicagometallic.com. 2. USG: www.usg.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Acoustical Units - General: ASTM E1264, Class A. 2.03 SUSPENSION SYSTEM(S) A. Chicago Metallic Corporation: www.chicagometallic.com. B. USG: www.usg.com, C. Suspension Systems - General: Complying with ASTM C63510635M; die cut and interlocking components, with stabilizer bars, clips, splices, perimeter moldings, and hold down clips as required. D. Exposed Steel Suspension System Type SS1: Formed steel, commercial quality cold rolled; heavy-duty. 1. Profile: Tee; 15116 inch wide face. 2. Construction: Double web. 3. Finish: White. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, seismic requirements, and ceiling system flatness requirement specified. B. Perimeter Moldings: Same material and finish as grid. 1. At Exposed Grid: Provide L-shaped molding for mounting at same elevation as face of grid. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. 3.02 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C63610636M, ASTM E5801E580M, and manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this section. B. Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum deflection of 1:360. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 095100-83 SECTION 09 5100 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS C. Install after major above -ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. D. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. E. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance. F. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. G. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, or support components independently, H. Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotations of runners. 1. Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with other interruptions. 1. Use longest practical lengths. 2. Overlap and rivet corners. 3.03 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. C. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces. D. Install units after above -ceiling work is complete. E. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents. F. Cutting Acoustical Units: 1. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges. G. Where round obstructions occur, provide preformed closures to match perimeter molding. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 118 inch in 10 feet. B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 095100-84 SECTION 09 5100 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation. B. Field application of paints and other coatings. C. Scope: Finish all interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory -finished and unless otherwise indicated, including the following: 1. Mechanical and Electrical: a. In all areas, paint all insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, mechanical equipment, and electrical equipment, unless otherwise indicated. b. In finished areas, paint shop -primed items. c. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint to visible surfaces. D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1. Items fully factory -finished unless specifically so indicated; materials and products having factory -applied primers are not considered factory finished. 2. Items indicated to receive other finishes. 3. Items indicated to remain unfinished. 4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of equipment. 5. Floors, unless specifically so indicated. 6. Ceramic and other tiles. 7. Glass, 8. Acoustical materials, unless specifically so indicated. 9. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition. B. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications; 2014. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide complete list of all products to be used, with the following information for each: 1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category (e.g. "alkyd enamel"). PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 099000-85 SECTION 09 90 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved PAINTING AND COATING 2. MPI product number (e.g. MPI #47). 3. Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include description of each system. 4. Manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Samples For Verification: Submit three painted samples, illustrating selected colors and textures for each color and system selected with specified coats cascaded. Submit on cardstock sheet, B'/z x 11 inch in size. 1. Identify each sample by: a. Manufacturer, product name and product ID number. b. Color name and number. c. Sheen/gloss level. d. Supplier/distributor. e. Contact name and telephone number. D. Certification: By manufacturer that all paints and coatings comply with VOC limits specified. E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures. F. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and coated surfaces. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide primer, undercoater and finish coat for paint and other coating products from a single manufacturer for consideration of warranty and Owner maintenance. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified, with minimum three years documented experience, C. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified with minimum 5 years documented experience and approved by manufacturer. D. Conform to federal, state and local regulations, including VOC rules, at the time of application. E. Equipment: Comply with current OSHA regulations. F. Products: Maintain at Project Site a copy of Material Safety Data Sheets for each product used. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and Instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 099000-86 SECTION 09 90 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved PAINTING AND COATING B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations. C. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. D. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid -height at substrate surface. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide all paint and coating products used in any individual system from the same manufacturer; no exceptions. B. Paints: 1. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com. C. Substitutions: Not permitted. 2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERAL A. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field -catalyzed coating. 1. Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. 2. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a single production run. 3. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions. B. Primers: As follows unless other primer is required or recommended by manufacturer of top coats; where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use primer categorized as "best" by the manufacturer. 1. Gypsum Board: Interior Institutional Low Odor/VOC Primer Sealer; MPI #149. C. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: 1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following: a, 40 CFR 59, Subpart D --National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings. b. Architectural coatings VOC limits of the State in which the Project is located. 2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Sheens: Provide the sheens specified; where sheen is not specified, sheen will be selected later by Architect/Engineer from the manufacturer's full line. E. Colors: As indicated on drawings PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 099000-87 SECTION 09 90 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved PAINTING AND COATING 1, Extend colors to surface edges; colors may change at any edge as directed by ArchitecVEngineer. 2. In all areas, finish pipes, ducts, conduit, and equipment the same color as the wall/ceiling they are mounted onlunder. 2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS . INTERIOR A. All Interior Surfaces Indicated to be Painted, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Including gypsum board and shop primed steel. 1. Three top coats and one coat primer. 2. Top Coat(s): Interior Latex; MPI #43, 44, 52, 53, 54, 114, 3. Flat: MPI gloss level 1; use this sheen for ceilings and other overhead surfaces. 4. Eggshell: MPI gloss level 3; use this sheen at locations shown on drawings. 5. Satin: MPI gloss level 4; use this sheen at locations shown on drawings. 6. Semi -Gloss: MPI gloss level 5; use this sheen as indicated on drawings. 7. Gloss: MPI gloss level 6; use this sheen as indicated on drawings. 8. Primer(s): As recommended by manufacturer of top coats. 2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Accessory Materials: Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and clean-up materials required to achieve the finishes specified whether specifically indicated or not; commercial quality. B. Patching Material: Latex filler. C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin application of coatings until substrates have been properly prepared. B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Arch itectlEngineer of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. E. Test shop -applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. F. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 099000-88 SECTION 09 90 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved PAINTING AND COATING C. Remove or repair existing coatings that exhibit surface defects. D. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. E. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat. F. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra -sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. G. Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair. H. Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer. I. Corroded Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Prepare using at least SSPC-SP 2 (hand tool cleaning) or SSPC-SP 3 (power tool cleaning) followed by SSPC-SP 1 (solvent cleaning). J. Uncorroded Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime paint entire surface; spot prime after repairs. K. Shop -Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Re -prime entire shop -primed item. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. B. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is applied. D. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied. E. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. F. Dark Colors and Deep Clear Colors: Regardless of number of coats specified, apply as many coats as necessary for complete hide. G. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish. H. Vacuum dean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat. 1. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 099000-89 SECTION 09 90 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved PAINTING AND COATING 3.04 CLEANING A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect finished coatings until completion of project. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 099000-90 SECTION 09 90 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved PAINTING AND COATING SECTION 10 21 13.13 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal toilet compartments. B. Urinal screens. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 0610 00 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking and supports. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A4241A424M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, for Porcelain Enameling; 2009a. B. ASTM A653IA653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc - Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process; 2015. C. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold -Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: Coordinate the work with placement of support framing and anchors in walls and ceilings. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate partition plan, elevation views, dimensions, details of wall supports, door swings. C. Product Data: Provide data on panel construction, hardware, and accessories. D. Samples: Submit two samples of partition panels, 3 x 5 inch in size illustrating panel finish, color, and sheen. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Metal Toilet Compartments: 1. Metpar Corp: www.metpar.com. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements, 2.02 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: Hot -dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653IA653M, with G90/Z275 coating. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 10 2113.13 - 91 SECTION 10 2113.13 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Toilet Compartments: Powder coated steel, Floor Mounted - Headrail Braced - Privacy Type, B. Doors, Panels, and Pilasters: Sheet steel faces, pressure bonded to sound deadening core, formed and closed edges; corners made with corner clips or mitered, welded, and ground smooth. 1. Panel Faces: 20 gage, 0.0359 inch. 2. Door Faces: 22 gage, 0.0299 inch, 3. Pilaster Faces: 20 gage, 0.0359 inch. 4. Reinforcement: 12 gage, 0.1046 inch. 5. Internal Reinforcement: Provide in areas of attached hardware and fittings. Mark locations of reinforcement for partition mounted washroom accessories. C. Door and Panel Dimensions; 1. Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Door Width: 24 inch. 3. Door Width for Handicapped Use: 36 inch. 4. Height: 58 inch. D. Pilasters: 1-114 inch thick, of sizes required to suit compartment width and spacing. E. Urinal Screens: Wall mounted with two panel brackets. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Pilaster Shoes: Formed ASTM A666, Type 304 stainless steel with No. 4 finish, 3 inch high, concealing floor fastenings. 1. Provide adjustment for floor variations with screw jack through steel saddles integral with pilaster. B. Head Rails: Hollow stainless steel tube, 1 x 1-5/8 inch size, with anti -grip strips and cast socket wall brackets. C. Privacy Rails: Stainless steel extrusions at doorjamb and hinge locations - continuous. D. Brackets: Satin stainless steel. E. Attachments, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel, tamper proof type. 1. For attaching panels and pilasters to brackets: Through -bolts and nuts; tamper proof. F. Hardware: Satin stainless steel: 1. Pivot hinges, gravity type, adjustable for door close positioning; two per door. 2. Nylon bearings. 3. Thumb turn or sliding door latch with exterior emergency access feature. 4. Door strike and keeper with rubber bumper; mounted on pilaster in alignment with door latch. 5. Coat hook with rubber bumper; one per compartment, mounted on door. 6. Provide door pull for outswinging doors. 2.05 FINISHING A. Powder Coated Steel Compartments: Clean, degrease, and neutralize. Follow immediately with a phosphatizing treatment, prime coat and two finish coats powder coat enamel. B. Calor: Single color as selected for each project site PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 10 2113.13 - 92 SECTION 10 2113.13 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. C. Verify correct spacing of and between plumbing fixtures. D. Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install partitions secure, rigid, plumb, and level in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Maintain 318 to 112 inch space between wall and panels and between wall and end pilasters. C. Attach panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices. D. Attach panels and pilasters to brackets. Locate head rail joints at pilaster center lines. E. Field touch-up of scratches or damaged enamel finish will not be permitted. Replace damaged or scratched materials with new materials. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From True Position: 114 inch. B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 118 inch. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 3116 inch. B. Adjust hinges to position doors in partial opening position when unlatched. Return out swinging doors to closed position. C. Adjust adjacent components for consistency of line or plane. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 10 2113,13 - 93 SECTION 10 21 13.13 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS SECTION 10 26 00 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Accessories for toilet rooms and showers. B. Battery operated paper towel dispensers. C. Grab bars. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 0610 00 - Rough Carpentry: Concealed supports for accessories, including in wal framing and plates and above ceiling framing. B. Section 09 30 00 - Tiling: Ceramic washroom accessories. C. Section 10 21 13.13 - Metal Toilet Compartments. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A123IA123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2015. B. ASTM A2691A269M - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service; 2015. C. ASTM A6531A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc - Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process; 2015, D. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold -Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar, 2015, E. ASTM B456 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Pius Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium; 2011. F. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011. G. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat -Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass; 2012. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement, concealed ceiling supports, and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, and attachment methods. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and conditions requiring special attention. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 102800-94 SECTION 10 28 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Products listed on the Drawings are made by American Specialities Corp.; www.amehcanspecialities.com. B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Bradley Corporation: www.bradleycorp.com. 2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.: www.bobrick.com. 3. Substitutions: Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. C. All items to be made by the same manufacturer. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Accessories -General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete with anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. 1. Grind welded joints smooth. 2. Fabricate units made of metal sheet of seamless sheets, with flat surfaces. B. Keys: Provide 2 keys for each accessory to Owner; master key all lockable accessories. C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, Type 304. D. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269, Type 304 or 316. E. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Hot -dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A6531A653M, with G9O/Z275 coating. F. Mirror Glass: Tempered safety glass, ASTM C1048; and ASTM C1036 Type], Class 1, Quality Q2, with silvering as required. G. Adhesive: Two component epoxy type, waterproof. H. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized, tamper -proof, security type. I. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate. 2.03 FINISHES A. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin brushed finish, unless otherwise noted. B. Chrome/Nickel Plating: ASTM B456, SC 2, satin finish, unless otherwise noted. C. Baked Enamel: Pretreat to clean condition, apply one coat primer and minimum two coats epoxy baked enamel. D. Galvanizing for Items Other than Sheet: Comply with ASTM A1231A123M; galvanize ferrous metal and fastening devices. E. Shop Primed Ferrous Metals; Pretreat and clean, spray apply one coat primer and bake. F. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 102800-95 SECTION 10 28 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation. C. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on drawings. D. See Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry for installation of blocking, reinforcing plates, and concealed anchors in walls and ceilings. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Deliver inserts and rough -in frames to site for timely installation. B. Provide templates and rough -in measurements as required. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. C. Mounting Heights: As required by accessibility regulations, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Grab Bars: As indicated on the drawings. D. Mounting Heights and Locations: As required by accessibility regulations and as indicated on drawings. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect installed accessories from damage due to subsequent construction operations. 3.05 SCHEDULE A. Refer to drawings for schedule of toilet accessories. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 102800-96 SECTION 10 28 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES SECTION 12 36 00 COUNTERTOPS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Countertops for architectural cabinet work. B. Wall -hung counters and vanity tops. C. Sinks molded into countertops. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 4100 - Custom Casework. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A208.2 - American National Standard for Medium Density Fiberboard for Interior Use; 2009. B. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2015a. C. AWIIAWMACIWI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2014. D. AWMACIWI (NAAWS) - North American Architectural Woodwork Standards, U.S. Version 3.0; 2016. E. IAPMO 2124 - Plastic Plumbing Fixtures; 2012. F. ISFA 2-01 - Classification and Standards for Solid Surfacing Material; 2013. G. NEMA LD 3 - High -Pressure Decorative Laminates; 2005. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Specimen warranty. C. Shop Drawings: Complete details of materials and installation; combine with shop drawings of cabinets and casework specified in other sections. D. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, minimum size 6 inches square, representing actual product, color, and patterns. E. Test Reports: Chemical resistance testing, showing compliance with specified requirements. F. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. G. Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for maintenance and repair of countertop surfaces. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 123600-97 SECTION 12 36 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUB.ER, INC.; All Rights Reserved COUNTERTOPS 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store and dispose of solvent -based materials, and materials used with solvent -based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 COUNTERTOPS A. Quality Standard: Custom Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMACIWI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS), unless noted otherwise. B. Solid Surfacing Countertops and Sinks: Solid surfacing sheet or plastic resin casting over continuous substrate. 1. Flat Sheet Thickness: 114 inch, minimum unless noted otherwise. 2. Solid Surfacing Sheet and Plastic Resin Castings: Complying with (SFA 2-01 and NEMA LD 3; acrylic or polyester resin, mineral filler, and pigments; homogenous, non -porous and capable of being worked and repaired using standard woodworking tools; no surface coating; color and pattern consistent throughout thickness. a. Manufacturers: 1) Avonite Surfaces: www.avonitesurfaces.com. 2) Substitutions: Not permitted. b. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25, maximum; smoke developed index of 450, maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. c. NSF approved for food contact. d. Sinks and Bowls: Avonite: Model: VS1815 Oval Vanity Bowl (Undermount - Integral) Integral castings; minimum 314 inch wall thickness; comply with IAPMO Z124. Color: Ivory FI -8106 - Matte Finish. e. Finish on Exposed Surfaces: Matte and Gloss Finish as indicated. f. Products: (No Substitutions) 1) Avonite; Studio Collection: Color #K3-8343 - Pearl - Gloss Finish (Village Hall). 3. Other Components Thickness: 112 inch, minimum. 4. Exposed Edge Treatment: Built up to minimum 1-114 inch thick; radiused edge . 5. Back and End Splashes: Same sheet material, square top; minimum 4 inches high. 6. Skirts: Where indicated on drawings. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Medium Density Fiberboard for Supporting Substrate: ANSI A208.2. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 123600-98 SECTION 12 36 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved COUNTERTOPS B. Adhesives: Chemical resistant waterproof adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of materials being joined. C. Joint Sealant: Mildew -resistant silicone sealant, clear. D. Support Brackets: 2 x 2114 inch thick painted steel construction. 1. Application: Provide where no other support (e.g. fabricated plastic laminate support brackets) is indicated on drawings. 2. Manufacturers: a. A&M Hardware, Inc.: www.aandmhardware .00m. b. Rakks/Rangine Corporation; www.rakks.com. 3. Products: a. Counters Up To 18 Inches Deep: 1) A&M #C-12. 2) Rakks #EH -1212. b. Counters 19 To 24 Inches Deep: 1) A&M #C-18. 2) Rakks #EH -1818. c. counters 25 To 30 Inches Deep: 1) A&M #C-24. 2) Rakks #EH -2424. 4. Use A&M brackets or Rakks "Flush Mount" configuration (vertical leg concealed in wall) at drywall locations and where indicated on Drawings. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate tops and splashes in the largest sections practicable, with top surface of joints flush. 1. Join lengths of tops using best method recommended by manufacturer. 2. Fabricate to overhang fronts and ends of cabinets 1 inch except where top butts against cabinet or wall. 3. Prepare all cutouts accurately to size; replace tops having improperly dimensioned or unnecessary cutouts or fixture holes. B. Provide backend splash wherever counter edge abuts vertical surface unless otherwise indicated. 1. Secure to countertop with concealed fasteners and with contact surfaces set in waterproof glue. 2. Height: 4 inches, unless otherwise indicated. C. Solid Surfacing: Fabricate tops up to 144 inches long in one piece; join pieces with adhesive sealant in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. D. Wall -Mounted Counters: Provide skirts, aprons, and brackets as indicated on drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify ArchitecUEngineer of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. PROJECT N0, 17-210-1103 123600-99 SECTION 12 36 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved COUNTERTOPS C, Verify that wall surfaces have been finished and mechanical and electrical services and outlets are installed in proper locations. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Securely attach countertops to cabinets using concealed fasteners. Make flat surfaces level, shim where required. B. Seal joints between backlend splashes and vertical surfaces. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Variation From Horizontal: 118 inch in 10 feet, maximum. B. Offset From Wall, Countertops: 118 inch maximum; 1/16 inch minimum. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean countertops surfaces thoroughly. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 17-210-1903 123600-100 SECTION 12 36 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; AI Rights Reserved COUNTERTOPS SECTION 2105 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe, fittings, sleeves, escutcheons, seals, and connections for sprinkler systems. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASME B16.1 - Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and 250; 2010, B. ASME 816.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: Classes 150 and 300; 2011. C. ASME 816.4 - Gray Iron Threaded Fittings: Classes 125 and 250; 2011. D. ASME 816.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings NPS 112 Through NPS 24 Metric/Inch Standard; 2011 E. ASTM A471A47M - Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings; 1999 (Reapproved 2014). F. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems; 2016, 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers, with labeling in place. B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS A. Sprinkler Systems: Conform to NFPA 13, B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME BPVC-IX. 2.02 ABOVE GROUND PIPING A. Steel Pipe: Schedule 40, black. 1. Steel Fittings: ASME B16.5, steel flanges and fittings. 2. Cast Iron Fittings: ASME 816.1, flanges and flanged fittings and ASME B16.4, threaded fittings. 3. Malleable Iron Fittings: ASME 616.3, threaded fittings and ASTM A471A47M. 4. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, "C" shaped elastomeric sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized for galvanized pipe. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 21 05 00 -101 SECTION 2105 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 2.03 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A, Hangers for Pipe Sizes 112 to 1-112 inch: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring. B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and foreign material, from inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install sprinkler system and service main piping, hangers, and supports in accordance with NFPA 13. B. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure. Maintain gradient. C. Install piping to conserve building space, to not interfere with use of space and other work. D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. F. Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Install hangers to provide minimum 1f2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. 2. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. 3. Use hangers with 1-112 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. 4. Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. 5. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. G. Do not penetrate building structural members unless indicated. H. When installing more than one piping system material, ensure system components are compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system. Provide necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and couplings for servicing are consistently provided. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 210500-102 SECTION 2105 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION SECTION 2113 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wet -pipe sprinkler system. B. System design, installation, and certification. 1,02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 2105 00 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION; Pipe, fittings, and valves. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. FM Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Global; current edition. B. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems; 2016, C. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to UL (DIR) requirements. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3 years experience approved by manufacturer. D. Equipment and Components: Provide products that bear UL (DIR) label or marking. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in shipping containers and maintain in place until installation. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SPRINKLER SYSTEM A. Sprinkler System: Provide coverage for building areas noted. B. Storage Cabinet for Spare Sprinklers and Tools: Steel, location as directed by owner, 2.02 SPRINKLERS A. Suspended Ceiling Type: Concealed pendant type with matching push on escutcheon plate. 1. Response Type: Quick, 2. Coverage Type: Standard, 3. Finish: Chrome Plated -Fire Station; White Enamel -Village Hall 4. Fusible Link: Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 21 13 00 -103 SECTION 2113 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS 2.03 STAINLESS STEEL FLEXIBLE DROPS A. Manufacturers: 1. Aqua Flex. 2. Victaulic Company, B. In lieu of rigid pipe offsets or return bends. Braided type 304 stainless steel flexible tube with male threaded pipe nipple for connection to branchline piping, and a zinc plated steel reducer with a 112" or 314" NPT female thread for connection to a sprinkler head. The hoses shall be factory -pressure tested to 400 psi. C. Flexible drop shall attach to the ceiling grid with open gate bracket and can be installed without the use of special tools. D. The braided drop shall be FM approved for sprinkler services to 200 psi. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with referenced NFPA design and installation standard. B. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work. D. Place piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings. E. Center sprinklers in two directions in ceiling the and provide piping offsets as required. 3.02 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Ensure required devices are installed and connected as required to fire alarm system. 3.03 SCHEDULES A. System Hazard Areas: 1. Offices: Light Hazard. 2. Other Areas: In accordance with NFPA 13. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 21 13 00 -104 SECTION 21 13 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS SECTION 22 0719 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Piping insulation. B. Jackets and accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping. B. Section 22 10 05 - Plumbing Piping: Placement of hangers and hanger inserts. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady -State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded -Hot -Plate Apparatus; 2013, B. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation; 2015, C. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2015a. D. ASTM E96YE96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2014, E. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Current Edition, Including All Revisions, 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section with minimum three years of experience. B. Comply with the Midwest Insulation Contractors Association "National Commercial and Industrial Insulation Standards". 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density, and thickness. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product. B. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24 hours. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index/Smoke developed index of 25150, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 2207 19-105 SECTION 22 07 19 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 2.42 GLASS FIBER A. Manufacturers: 1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Johns Manville Corporation. 3. Knauf Insulation. 4. Owens Corning Corp. B. Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; semi-rigid, noncombustible, end grain adhered to jacket. 1. 'K' Value: ASTM 0177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 650 degrees F. 3. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume. C. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film; moisture vapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E96IE96M of 0.02 perm -inches. D. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation. 2.03 LAVATORY PIPE INSULATION A. Manufacturer: 1. Plumberex. 2. Brocar. 3. Truebro, B. Insulation: Fully molded closed cell vinyl, ft to lavatory P -trap, tailpiece and angle valve stop assemblies. Vinyl shall be antimicrobial with UV inhibitors and utilize reusable fasteners. C. Color: Almond. 2.04 JACKETS A. PVC Plastic. 1. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color. a. Minimum Service Temperature: 0 degrees F. b. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F. c. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.002 perm inch, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E961E96M. d. Thickness: 10 mil. e. Connections. Brush on welding adhesive. 2. Covering Adhesive Mastic: Compatible with insulation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials. B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 22 0719 -106 SECTION 22 07 19 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION B. Install in accordance with North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (NAIMA) National Insulation Standards. C. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. D. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, and expansion joints. All hangers, supports, anchors and other projections that are in contact to cold surfaces shall be insulated and vapor sealed to prevent condensation. E. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: 1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory -applied or field -applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive or PVC fitting covers. F. For hot piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F or less, do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation. G. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature: 1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory -applied or field -applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers. H. Inserts and Shields: 1. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts. 1. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions, At fire separations, refer to Section 07 64 00. J. Apply insulation at pipe hangers and supports according to National Commercial and Industrial Standards Plate Numbers 5, 6 and 7. 3.03 SCHEDULES A. Plumbing Systems: 1. Domestic Hot Water Supply: a, Glass Fiber Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range: Up to and including 2 inch. a) Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Domestic Cold Water: a. Glass Fiber Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range: All sizes. a) Thickness: 1 inch. 3. Lavatory Piping: a. Closed Cell Vinyl. 1) Thickness: 3/16 inch. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 2207 19- 107 SECTION 22 07 19 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION SECTION 2210 05 PLUMBING PIPING PART 7 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe, pipe fittings, valves, and connections for piping systems. 1. Sanitary sewer. 2. Domestic water. 3. Flanges, unions, and couplings. 4. Pipe hangers and supports. 7.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping. B. Section 22 05 53 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. C. Section 22 07 19 - Plumbing Piping Insulation. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASME B 16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; 2012. B. ASME 1316.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder -Joint Pressure Fittings; 2013, C. ASME B 16.23 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV; 2011, D, ASME B16.29 - Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV; 2012. E. ASTM A74 - Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings; 2015, F. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008 (Reapproved 2014). G. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2014, H. ASTM B306 - Standard Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV); 2013. 1. ASTM B813 - Standard Specification for Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube; 2010. J. ASTM 8828 - Standard Practice for Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube and Fittings; 2002 (Reapproved 2010). K. ASTM C564 - Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings; 2014. L. ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems; 2012. M. ASTM D2729 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings; 2011. N. ASTM D2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent -Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings; 1996 (Reapproved 2010). 0. AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains; 2005, PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 2210 05 -108 SECTION 2210 05 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved PLUMBING PIPING P. CISPI 301 - Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste and Vent Piping Applications; 2009, Q. CISPI 310 - Specification for Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications; 2011, R. MSS SP -58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation; 2009, S. MSS SP -110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket -Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends; 2010, T. NSF 61- Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2014 (Errata 2015). U. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2011. V. Safe Drinking Water Act, Section 1417 - Lead Free: Refers to the wetted surface of pipe, fittings and fixtures in potable water systems that have a weighted average lead content <= 0.25%, Amended January 4, 2011. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with applicable codes. B. Perform Work in accordance with City plumbing ordinances. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. B. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Potable Water Supply Systems: Provide piping, pipe fittings, and solder and flux (if used), that comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for maximum lead content; label pipe and fittings. 2.02 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74, service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joint Seals: ASTM 0564 neoprene gaskets, or lead and oakum. B. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight, 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp -and -shield assemblies. C. Copper Tube: ASTM B306, DWV. 1. Fittings: ASME B16,29, wrought copper, or ASME B16.23, sovent. 2. Joints: ASTM B32, alloy Sn50 solder. D. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2729. 1. Fittings: PVC. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 22 10 05 -109 SECTION 2210 05 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved PLUMBING PIPING 2. Joints: Solvent welded, with ASTM D2564 solvent cement, 2.03 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Copper Tube: ASTM B88 (ASTM 1388M), Type L (B), Drawn (H). 1. Fittings: ASME 1316.18, cast copper alloy or ASME 1316.22, wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints: ASTM 1332, alloy Sn95 solder. 3. Mechanical Press Sealed Fittings: Double pressed type, NSF 61 approved or certified, utilizing EPDM, non toxic synthetic rubber sealing elements. Sealing elements shall be factory installed by fitting manufacturer. Press ends shall have means to indicate non -pressed fitting during pressure testing, a. Manufacturers: 1) Viega LLC, 2) Nibco. 2.04 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS A. Unions for Pipe Sizes 3 Inches and Under: 1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded unions. 2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints. B. Flanges for Pipe Size Over 1 Inch: 1. Ferrous Pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded or forged steel slip-on flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets. 2. Copper Tube and Pipe: Class 150 slip-on bronze flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets. C. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier. 2,05 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP -58. 1. If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, select appropriate type using MSS SP -58 recommendations. 2. Overhead Supports: Individual steel rod hangers attached to structure or to trapeze hangers. 3. Trapeze Hangers: Welded steel channel frames attached to structure. 4. Vertical Pipe Support: Steel riser clamp. B. Plumbing Piping - Drain, Waste, and Vent: 1. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 112 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring, 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 3. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook. 4. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. 5. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 6. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated. C. Plumbing Piping - Water: 1. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-112 Inches: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring. 2. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis, 3. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 221005-110 SECTION 22 10 05 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved PLUMBING PIPING 4. Wall Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp with adjustable steel yoke and cast iron pipe roll. 5. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated. 2.06 BALL VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Milwaukee Valve Company. 2. Nibco, Inc; TIS -585 -66 -LF, 3. Watts. 4. Apollo, B. Construction, 4 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP -110, Class 150, 400 psi CWP, bronze body, 304 stainless steel ball, regular port, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, blow-out proof stem, lever handle with balancing stops, solder, threaded, or grooved ends. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. C. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough - in and installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide non -conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls, D, Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of space. E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. F. Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting. G. Copper Pipe and Tube: Make soldered joints in accordance with ASTM B828, using specified solder, and flux meeting ASTM B813; in potable water systems use flux also complying with NSF 61 and NSF 372, H. PVC Pipe: Make solvent -welded joints in accordance with ASTM D2855. 1. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors. J. Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Support horizontal piping as scheduled. 2. Install hangers to provide minimum 112 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. 3. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. 4. Use hangers with 1-112 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 2210 05 -111 SECTION 2210 05 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved PLUMBING PIPING 5. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. 6. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping. 7. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. B. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Solder adapters to pipe. C. Install ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Drainage Piping: Establish invert elevations within 112 inch vertically of location indicated and slope to drain at minimum of 118 inch per foot slope. B. Water Piping: Slope at minimum of 1/32 inch per foot and arrange to drain at low points. 3.05 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM A. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean. B. Ensure Ph of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric). C. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual. D. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15 percent of outlets. E. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. F. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment. G. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L. H. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 percent of outlets and from water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651. 3.06 SCHEDULES A. Pipe Hanger Spacing: 1. Metal Piping: a. Pipe size: 112 inches to 1-114 inches: 1) Maximum hanger spacing: 6.5 ft. 2) Hanger rod diameter: 318 inches. b. Pipe size: 1-112 inches to 2 inches: 1) Maximum hanger spacing; 10 ft. 2) Hanger rod diameter: 318 inch. c. Pipe size; 2-112 inches to 3 inches: 1) Maximum hanger spacing: 10 ft. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 221005-112 SECTION 2210 05 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved PLUMBING PIPING 2) Hanger rod diameter: 112 inch. 2. Plastic Piping: a. All Sizes: 1) Maximum hanger spacing: 6 ft. 2) Hanger rod diameter: 318 inch. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 22 10 05 -113 SECTION 22 10 05 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 2210 06 PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Drains. B. Hose bibbs. C. Water hammer arrestors. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 22 40 00 - Plumbing Fixtures. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASME Al 12.6.3 - Floor and Trench Drains; 2001 (R2007). B. ASSE 1019 - Performance Requirements for Wall Hydrant with Backflow Protection and Freeze Resistance; 2011. C. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2014 (Errata 2015). D. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2011. E. PDI -WH 201 -Water Hammer Arresters; 2010. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Specialties in Potable Water Supply Systems: Provide products that comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for maximum lead content. 2.02 DRAINS A. Manufacturers: 1. MIFAB. 2. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company. 3. Zum Industries, Inc. B. Floor Drain (FD -1): 1. ASME Al 12.6.3; lacquered cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange, weep holes, reversible clamping collar, and 6 inch round, adjustable stainless steel (nickel -bronze) strainer. 2. MIFAB; Model F1000 -C-6-3 2.03 CLEANOUTS A. Manufacturers: 1. MIFAB, 2. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company. PROJECT NO, 17-210-1103 221006-114 SECTION 22 10 06 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES 3. Zurn Industries, Inc. B. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Floor Areas FCO: 1. Lacquered cast iron body with anchor flange, reversible clamping collar, threaded scoriated secured stainless steel (nickel bronze) top, and bronze gasketed plug. 2. MIFAB; Model C11220 -3413-R-3. C. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Wall Areas: 1. Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover, and round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw. 2. MIFAB; Model C1450 -RD. 2.04 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS A. Manufacturers: 1. MIFAB. 2. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company. 3. Zurn Industries, Inc. B. Water Hammer Arrestors: 1. Stainless steel construction, bellows type sized in accordance with PDl-WH 201, precharged suitable for operation in temperature range -100 to 300 degrees F and maximum 250 psi working pressure. 2. MIFAB; Model WHB, PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system. C. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor. D. Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valve on hot and cold water supply piping to plumbing fixtures. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 2210 06 -115 SECTION 2210 06 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES SECTION 22 40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Water closets. B. Urinals, C. Lavatories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 22 10 05 - Plumbing Piping, 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASME Al 12.6.1M - Supports for Off -the -Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use; 1997 (Reaffirmed 2002). B. ASME A112,18.1 - Plumbing Supply Fittings; 2012. C. ASME Al 12,19.2 - Ceramic Plumbing Fixtures; 2013. D. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2014 (Errata 2015). E. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2011. 1,04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide catalog illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough -in dimensions, utility sizes, trim, and finishes. C. Maintenance Data: Include fixture trim exploded view and replacement parts lists. D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1,05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage. B. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in place to protect fixtures and prevent use. PROJECT NO, 17-210-1103 22 40 00 -116 SECTION 22 40 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved PLUMBING FIXTURES 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00- Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Potable Water Systems: Provide plumbing fittings and faucets that comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for maximum lead content; label pipe and fittings. 2.02 FLUSH VALVE WATER CLOSET (WC -1), ADAAG COMPLIANT A. Water Closets: Vitreous china, ASME Al 12,19.2, wall hung, siphon jet flush action. 1. Bowl: ASME Al 12,19.2; 16.5 inches high with elongated rim. 2. Flush Valve: Exposed (top spud). 3. Flush Volume: 1.6 gallon, maximum. 4. Flush Operation: Sensor operated. 5. Handle Height: 11 inches or less. 6. Color: White, 7. Manufacturers: a. American Standard, Inc. b. Sloan Valve Company. c. Zurn industries, Inc; Model Z5615-BWL B. Flush Valves: ASME Al 12,18.1, diaphragm type, complete with vacuum breaker stops and accessories. 1. Sensor -Operated Type: Solenoid operator, battery powered, infrared sensor and dual flush over -ride push buttons. 2. Exposed Type: Chrome plated, escutcheon, integral screwdriver stop. 3. Manufacturers: a. Sloan Valve Company; Model ECOS 8111-1.611.1. C. Seats: 1. Manufacturers; a. Bemis Manufacturing Company; Model 2155SSCT. b. Church Seat Company. c. Olsonite. 2. Solid antimicrobial white plastic, open front, extended back, self-sustaining hinge, brass bolts, without cover. D. Water Closet Carriers: 1. Manufacturers: a. MIFAB. b. J.R. Smith. c. Zurn Industries, Inc. 2. ASME Al 12.6.1 M; adjustable cast iron frame, integral drain hub and vent, adjustable spud, lugs for floor and wall attachment, threaded fixture studs with nuts and washers. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 224000-117 SECTION 22 40 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved PLUMBING FIXTURES 2.03 FLUSH VALVE WATER CLOSETS (WC -2) A. Water Closets: Vitreous china, ASME Al 12,19.2, elongated rim, wall hung, siphon jet flush action, china bolt caps. 1. Flush Volume: 1.6 gallon, maximum. 2. Flush Valve: Exposed (top spud). 3. Flush Operation: Sensor operated. 4. Manufacturers: a. American Standard Inc. b. Sloan Valve Company. c. Zurn industries, Inc; Model Model Z5615-BWL. B. Flush Valves: ASME A112.18.1, diaphragm type, complete with vacuum breaker stops and accessories. 1. Sensor -Operated Type: Solenoid operator, battery powered, infrared sensor and dual flush over -ride push buttons. 2. Exposed Type: Chrome plated, escutcheon, integral screwdriver stop. 3. Manufacturers: a. Sloan Valve Company; Model ECOS 8111-1.611.1. b. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. C. Seats: 1. Manufacturers: a. Bemis Manufacturing Company; Model 2155SSC. b. Church Seat Company. c. Olsonite. 2. Solid antimicrobial white plastic, open front, extended back, self-sustaining hinge, brass bolts, without cover. D. Water Closet Carriers: 1. Manufacturers: a. MIFAB. b. J.R. Smith. c. Zurn Industries, Inc. 2. ASME A112.6.1 M; adjustable cast iron frame, integral drain hub and vent, adjustable spud, lugs for floor and wall attachment, threaded fixture studs with nuts and washers. 2.04 WALL HUNG URINALS (UR -1), ADAAG COMPLIANT A. Wall Hung Urinal Manufacturers: 1. American Standard, Inc. 2. Sloan Valve Company, 3. Zurn Industries, Inc; Model Z5755 -U, B. Urinals: Vitreous china, ASME A112,19.2, wall hung with side shields and concealed carrier, 1. Flush Volume: 1.0 gallon, maximum. 2. Flush Style: Washout, 3. Flush Valve: Exposed (top spud). 4. Flush Operation: Sensor operated. 5. Trap: Integral. PROJECT N0, 17-210-1103 224000-118 SECTION 22 40 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved PLUMBING FIXTURES 6. Removable stainless steel strainer. C. Flush Valves: ASME Al 12.18.1, diaphragm type, complete with vacuum breaker stops and accessories. 1. Sensor -Operated Type: Solenoid operator, battery powered, infrared sensor and over -ride push button. 2. Exposed Type: Chrome plated, escutcheon, integral screwdriver stop. D. Manufacturers: 1. Sloan Valve Company; Model Optima Plus 8186. E. Carriers: 1. Manufacturers: a. MIFAB. b. J.R. Smith. c. Zurn Industries, Inc. 2.05 LAVATORY (L-1), ADAAG COMPLIANT A. Lavatory integral to counter provided under Division 12. B. Supply Faucet Manufacturers: 1. Sloan Valve Company; Model BASYS, EFX380.21 0,000. C. Sensor Operated Faucet: Cast brass, chrome plated, deck mounted with capacitance sensing and turbine. 1. Spout Style: Standard, 2. Power Supply: Self -generating, hydro -powered turbine charging rechargeable battery. 3. Mixing Valve: ASSE 1017, underdeck, thermostatic mixing valve. 4. Water Supply: 318 inch compression connections. 5. Aerator: Vandal resistant, 0.5 GPM, laminar flow device. 6. Sensor range: Factory set at a minimum of 3 inch adjustable up to 24 inch. 7. Finish: Polished chrome. D. Accessories: 1. Chrome plated 17 gage, 0.0538 inch brass P -trap with clean-out plug and arm with escutcheon. 2. Offset waste with perforated open strainer. 3. Screwdriver stops. 4. Rigid supplies. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures. B. Confirm that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the installation of counter top lavatories and sinks. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Rough -in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture rough -in schedule for particular fixtures. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 22 40 00 -119 SECTION 22 40 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved PLUMBING FIXTURES 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning. B. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with loose key stops, reducers, and escutcheons. C. Install components level and plumb. D. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall supports and bolts. 3.04 INTERFACE WITH WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS A. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough - in and installation. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow. 3.06 CLEANING A. Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage due to subsequent construction operations. B. Do not permit use of fixtures by construction personnel. C. Repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 224000-120 SECTION 22 40 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUSER, INC.; All Rights Reserved PLUMBING FIXTURES SECTION 23 3100 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal ductwork. B. Nonmetal ductwork. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 23 37 00 - Air Outlets and Inlets. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASHRAE (FUND) - ASHRAE Handbook - Fundamentals; 2013. B. ASTM A361A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014. C. ASTM A6531A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc - Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process; 2015. D. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2015a. E. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air -Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; 2015, F. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible; 2005 (Rev. 2009). 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A standards. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant manufacturers. B. Maintain temperatures within acceptable range during and after installation of duct sealants. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel for Ducts: Hot -dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A6531A653M FS Type B, with G90/Z275 coating. B. Joint Sealers and Sealants: Non -hardening, water resistant, mildew and mold resistant. 1. Type: Heavy mastic or liquid used alone or with tape, suitable for joint configuration and compatible with substrates, and recommended by manufacturer for pressure class of ducts. 2, VOC Content: Not more than 250 gIL, excluding water. 3. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread of zero, smoke developed of zero, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. C. Hanger Rod: ASTM A36IA36M; steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously threaded. PROJECT N0, 17-210-1103 233100-121 SECTION 23 3100 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS D. Ducts: Galvanized steel, unless otherwise indicated. E. Low Pressure Supply (System with Cooling Coils): 2 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel. F. General Exhaust: 1 inch w.g, pressure class, galvanized steel. G. Ductmate or WDCI duct connection systems are acceptable. Ductwork constructed using these systems shall refer to manufacturer's recommendations for sheet metal gage intermediate and joint reinforcement. 2.02 DUCTWORK FABRICATION A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and as indicated, B. Transfer Air and Sound Boots: 112 inch w.g. pressure class, lined galvanized steel. C. No variation of duct configuration or size permitted except by written permission. Size round duct installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE Handbook - Fundamentals. D. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. E. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-112 times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows must be used, provide airfoil turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation. F. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream. G. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings in accordance with SMACNA (DCS). H. Where ducts are connected to exterior wall louvers and duct outlet is smaller than louver frame, provide blank -out panels sealing louver area around duct. Use same material as duct, painted black on exterior side; seal to louver frame and duct. 2.03 MANUFACTURED DUCTWORK AND FITTINGS A. Flexible Ducts: Multiple layers of aluminum laminate supported by helically wound spring steel wire. 1. Insulation: Fiberglass insulation with aluminized vapor barrier film. 2. Pressure Rating: 10 inches WG positive and 1.0 inches WG negative. 3. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm. 4. Temperature Range: Minus 20 degrees F to 210 degrees F. B. Transverse Duct Connection System: SMACNA "E" rated rigidly class connection, interlocking angle and duct edge connection system with sealant, gasket, cleats, and corner clips in accordance with SMACNA (DCS). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install, support, and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA (DCS). B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 23 31 00 -122 SECTION 23 3100 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS C. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. D. Duct sizes indicated are inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining. E. Duct sizes indicated shall be of sizes indicated. However, necessary changes in shape offsets or crossovers to clear piping, lighting, building construction obstructions, etc. shall be made without additional cost. F. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. G. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports. H. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts directly or with 5 feet maximum length of flexible duct held in place with strap or clamp. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 23 31 00 - 123 SECTION 23 3100 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS SECTION 23 37 00 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Registers/grilles. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASHRAE Std 70 - Method of Testing the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets; 2006 (R2011), 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review outlets and inlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets showing type, size, location, application, and noise level. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test and rate air outlet and inlet performance in accordance with ASHRAE Std 70, B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Price Industries. B. Titus. C. Tuttle & Bailey. D. Nailor. 2.02 WALL EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES A. Type: Streamlined blades, 314 inch minimum depth, 314 inch maximum spacing, with spring or other device to set blades, horizontal face. B. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting. C. Fabrication: Aluminum extrusions, with factory baked enamel finish. D. Color: To be selected by Architect/Engineer from manufacturer's standard range. E. Damper: Integral, gang -operated, opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable from face. F. Titus Model 301 FL. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 233700-124 SECTION 23 37 00 Copyright 2017 by KI_UBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.41 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 8. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. C. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection. D. Provide balancing dampers on duct take -off to diffusers, and grilles and registers, despite whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 233700-125 SECTION 23 37 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS SECTION 26 05 00 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Basic Electrical Requirements and materials specifically applicable to Division 26 Sections, in addition to Division 1 - General Requirements. Section includes: 1. Electrical Identification. 2. Minor Demolition, 3. Conductors and Devices.2 4. Raceways and Boxes. 5. Supporting Devices. 1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, latest edition with amendments as adopted by the Village of Oak Brook, IL, B. Conform to building codes as adopted by the Village of Oak Brook, IL. C. Install electrical Work in accordance with the NECA Standard of Installation. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store and protect all materials as specified under the provisions of Section 0160 00 and as specified herein. B. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification. C. Ship products to the job site in their original packaging. Receive and store products in a suitable manner to prevent damage or deterioration. Keep equipment upright at all times. D. Investigate the spaces through which equipment must pass to reach its final destination. Coordinate with the manufacturer to arrange delivery at the proper stage of construction and to provide shipping splits where necessary. 1.05 PROJECTISITE CONDITIONS A. Install work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions. Drawings have omitted certain branch circuitry in areas for ease of reading. All branch circuitry is to be provided by Contractor. B. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of Work to meet Project conditions, including changes to Work specified in other Sections. Obtain permission from ArchitectlEngineer before proceeding as specified under modification procedures. PROJECT NO, 17-210-1103 260500-126 SECTION 26 05 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide Work as required for a complete and operational electrical installation. B. All products shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with industry standards. Standards, organizations, and their abbreviations as used hereafter, include the following: 1. American National Standards Institute, Inc (ANSI). 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 4. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). C. Install all Work in accordance with the NECA Standard of Installation. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all requested items in Division 26 Sections under provisions of Section 0130 00. 1.08 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions will be considered only as allowed within the provisions of Section 0160 00, 1.09 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Cooperate and assist in the preparation of project record documents under the provisions of Section 0178 00, 1.10 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION A. Proper project management and coordination is critical for a successful project. Manage and coordinate the Work with all other trades in accordance with Section 0130 00 requirements. Reliance on the Drawings and Specifications only for exact project requirements is insufficient for proper coordination. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WIRING METHODS A. All locations: Building wire in raceway. B. Use no wire smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits, and no smaller than 14 AWG for control wiring. 1. Use 10 AWG conductor for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuit home runs longer than 100 feet, Use minimum #10 AWG conductor wire in all the following locations: a. All programmable panel branch circuits (larger where indicated). b. All emergency lighting and exit branch circuits. 2.02 WIRE AND CABLE A. Manufacturers: 1. Okonite, 2. Southwire. 3. Collyer, B. Building Wire: PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 260500-127 SECTION 26 05 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 1. Feeders and Branch Circuits Larger Than 6 AWG: Copper, stranded conductor, 600 volt insulation. 2. Feeders and Branch Circuits 6 AWG and Smaller: Copper conductor, 600 volt insulation. 6 and 8 AWG, stranded conductor; smaller than 8 AWG, stranded conductor (solid for device terminations). 3. Control Circuits: Copper, stranded conductor, 600 volt insulation. 4. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 75 feet. 5. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 277 volt branch circuits longer than 200 feet. 6. Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits. C. Locations: 1. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire with Type THHN insulation in raceway. 2. Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire with Type THHN insulation in raceway. 3. Above Accessible Ceilings: Use only building wire with Type THHN insulation in raceway. 4. Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Use only building wire with Type THWN insulation in raceway. 2.03 WIRING DEVICES AND WALL PLATES A. Single Pole Switch: Specification grade. 1. Hubbell Model 1121. 2. P & S Model 521. 3. Leviton Model 1121. 4. Color: Ivory, B. Three-way Switch: Specification grade. 1. Hubbell Model 1123. 2. P & S Model 523, 3. Leviton Model 1123, 4. Color: Ivory, C. Duplex Convenience Receptacle: Nema 5-20R, duplex, specification grade. 1. Hubbell, 2. Bryant, 3. Leviton. 4. Color: Ivory, D. GFCI Receptacle: Nema 5-20R, duplex, GFCI, specification grade. 1. Hubbell Model GF -5362. 2. Slater Model SIR -20-F. 3. Eagle Model 647, 4. Color: Ivory, E. Decorative Cover Plate: 1. Hubbell, 2. Bryant, 3. Leviton. 4. Description: Ivory, metal. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 26 05 00 - 128 SECTION 26 05 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 2.04 RACEWAY REQUIREMENTS A. Use only specified raceway in the following locations: 1, Branch Circuits and Feeders: a. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Electrical metallic tubing. b. Exposed Dry Interior Finished Locations: Electrical metallic tubing. c. Exposed Dry Interior Unfinished Locations: Electrical metallic tubing. d. All other locations: Galvanized Rigid Metallic Conduit, B. Size raceways for conductor type installed. 1. Minimum Size Conduit Homerun to Panelboard: 314 -inch. 2.05 METALLIC CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. Conduit: I. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. 2. Electrical metallic tubing: ANSI C80.3, 3. Flexible Conduit: UL 1, zinc -coated steel. a. Liquidtight Flexible Conduit: UL360. Fittings shall be specifically approved for use with this raceway. B. Conduit Fittings: 1. Metal Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1. a. EMT fittings: Use set -screw indentor-type fittings. 2.06 NONMETALLIC TUBING A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon Co. 2. LCP National Plastics, Inc. 3. Pacific Western Extruded Plastics Co, B. Description: UL651A "Type EB and A PVC Conduit and HDPE Conduit." 1. Conduit: Schedule 40. Suitable for exposure to sunlight and direct burial. 2.07 CONDUIT HANGERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Minerrallac Electric Company. 2. Substitutions: Or Approved Equal. B. Description: 1. Standard conduit hanger, zinc -plated steel with bolts. 2. Threaded rod and hardware: Plated finish, size and length as required for loading and conditions. 2.08 BEAM CLAMPS A. Manufacturers: 1. Appleton. 2. Midwest. 3. Raco. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 26 05 00 -129 SECTION 26 05 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS B. Description: Malleable beam clamp, zinc plated steel. 2.09 ELECTRICAL BOXES A. Manufacturers: 1. Raco. 2. Steel City. 3. Appleton, 4. Substitutions: Or Approved Equal, B. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: ANSYNEMA OS 1, galvanized steel, suitable for installation in masonry: C. Equipment Support Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported; include 2 inch male fixture studs where required. D. Wet Location Outlet Boxes: Cast aluminum: Cast alloy, deep type, gasket cover, threaded hubs. 2.10 PENETRATION SEALANTS A. Fire -rated assemblies: Provide firestopping of all penetrations made by Work under this Contract in accordance with provisions of Section 07 84 00 requirements. B. Thermal and Moisture Protection: Provide thermal and moisture protection made by Work under this Contract of all exterior wall, floor and roof penetrations in accordance with Division 7 requirements. 2.11 MOTION SENSORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Leviton 2. Hubbell 3. Approved Equal B. Ceiling Mounted, 1. Dual technology (passive infrared and ultrasonic), 24VDC sensor with unobtrusive appearance and 360 degrees of coverage. a. Provide type/quantity of motion sensors to meet square foot coverage requirements. 2. Provide power pack for 24VDC controls and switching of 1201277V circuits. Minimum quantity of sensors per power pack: 2. 3. Sensor shall'continuously monitor space to identify usage patterns. Unit shall automatically adjust time delay and sensitivity settings for optimal performance and energy efficiency. 4. Time delay settings: Auto, fixed (5,10,15,20 or 30 minutes). 5. Sensitivity settings: Auto, reduced sensitivity (passive infrared) variable (ultrasonic). 6. (1) N/O and (1) NIC output. 2.12 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS A. Nameplates: Engraved three -layer laminated plastic, black letters on white background. B. Locations: 1. Each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure. C. Letter Size: 1. Use 118 inch letters for identifying individual equipment and loads. PROJECT NO, 17-210-1103 260500-130 SECTION 26 05 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 2. Use 114 inch letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads. D. Labels: Embossed adhesive tape, with 3116 inch white letters on a black background. Use only for identification of individual wall switches and receptacles and control device stations. 2.13 WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Brady Model PCPS, 2. Panduit Model PCM. 3. T & B Model WM, B. Description: Cloth type wire markers. C. Locations: Each conductor at panelboard gutters, pull boxes, and each load connection. D. Legend: 1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number indicated on drawings. 2.14 CONDUIT MARKERS A. Location: Furnish markers for each conduit longer than 6 feet. B. Spacing: 20 feet on center. C. Color: 1. 480 Volt System: Orange 2. 208 Volt System: Black 3. Fire Alarm System: Red, PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Demolition Drawings are based on casual field observation and are intended to identify the limits of the construction site. Remove all electrical systems in their entirety in proper sequence with the Work. B. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings for removal. C. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel experienced in such operations. D. Existing Fire Alarm System: Maintain existing system in service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Notify Owner, Architect/Engineer and local fire service at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area. E. Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions. F. Verify that supporting surfaces are ready to receive work. G. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings, in approximate locations, unless dimensioned. 1. Obtain verification from Architect/Engineer for locations of outlets throughout prior to rough -in. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 26 05 00 -131 SECTION 26 05 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS H. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive wire markers. I. Verify that interior of building is physically protected from weather. J. Verify that mechanical work which is likely to injure conductors has been completed. K. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway system before installing conductors. 3.02 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK A. Remove all existing electrical installations to accommodate new construction. B. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply. C. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces. D. Relocate existing fire alarm devices affected by wall, ceiling and floor demolition. E. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work. F. Properly dispose of all ballast to approved ballast recycler. Do not land fill ballasts. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Install nameplate and label parallel to equipment lines. B. Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws. C. Secure nameplates to inside surface of door on panelboard that is recessed in finished locations. D. Identify underground conduits using underground warning tape. Install one tape per trench at 3 inches below finished grade. E. Neatly train and secure wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards. F. Use wire pulling lubricant for pulling 4 AWG and larger wires. G. Route wire and cable as required to meet project conditions. 1. Wire and cable routing indicated is approximate unless dimensioned. 2. Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing and lengths required. H. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time. I. Protect exposed cable from damage. J. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment and panelboards. K. Support cables above accessible ceilings to keep them from resting on ceiling tiles. L. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors without perceptible temperature rise. M. Use split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. Tape uninsulated conductors and connector with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor. PROJECT NO, 17-210-1103 26 05 00 -132 SECTION 26 05 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS N. Provide anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation". 0. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, and conduit. P. Do not use powder -actuated anchors. Q. Do not drill or cut structural members. R. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel. Rigidly weld members or use hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts. S. Install surface -mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. T. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards one inch off wall. U. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in hollow partitions. V. Terminate spare conductors with electrical tape. W. Do not share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers. X. Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Install wall switches at height shown on drawings, OFF position down. 2. Install convenience receptacles at height shown on drawings grounding pole on bottom. 3. Install specific purpose receptacles at heights shown on Drawings. Y. Install wall plates flush and level. 1. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas. 2. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible ceilings, and on surface -mounted outlets. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 26 05 00 -133 SECTION 26 05 00 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 26 5100 LIGHTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Interior luminaires. B. Emergency lighting units. C. Ballasts and drivers. D. Lamps, E. Luminaire accessories. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010, B. NECAIIESNA 501 - Recommended Practice for Installing Exterior Lighting Systems; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2006. C. NEMA LE 4 - Recessed Luminaires, Ceiling Compatibility; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2012. D. ILL 1598 - Luminaires; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. E. UL 8750 - Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products; Current Edition, Including All Revisions, F. IESNA LM -63 - ANSI Approved Standard File Format for Electronic Transfer of Photometric Data and Related Information; Illuminating Engineering Society; 2002 (Reaffirmed 2008). G. NECAIIESNA 500 - Standard for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2006. H. NECAIIESNA 502 - Standard for Installing Industrial Lighting Systems; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2006, I. UL 924 - Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. ,!. UL 1598 - Luminaires; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the installation of luminaires with mounting surfaces installed under other sections or by others. Coordinate the work with placement of supports, anchors, etc, required for mounting. Coordinate compatibility of luminaires and associated trims with mounting surfaces at installed locations. 2. Coordinate the placement of luminaires with structural members, ductwork, piping, equipment, diffusers, fire suppression system components, and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 26 51 00 -134 SECTION 26 5100 Copyright 2017 by KLLIBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved LIGHTING 3. Notify Architect/Engineer of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Provide photometric calculations where luminaires are proposed for substitution upon request. 2. Indicate construction, installation and mounting details for products. 3. Wiring Diagrams: Submit wiring diagrams for all exit sign, night light, self-contained back-up battery lighting, battery ballasts and associated circuit breakers, programmable circuit breakers and/or emergency circuit breakers. C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including detailed information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mounting requirements, listings, service conditions, photometric performance, installed accessories, and ceiling compatibility; include model number nomenclature clearly marked with all proposed features. 1. LED Luminaires: a. Include estimated useful life, calculated based on IES LM -80 test data. b. Include IES LM -79 test report upon request. 2. Lamps: Include rated life, color temperature, color rendering index (CRI), and initial and mean lumen output. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Instructions for each product including information on replacement parts. F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. G. Project Record Documents: Record actual connections and locations of luminaires and any associated remote components. 1,05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Receive, handle, and store products according to NECA/IESNA 500 (commercial lighting), NECA/IESNA 502 (industrial lighting), and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Keep products in original manufacturer's packaging and protect from damage until ready for installation, PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 265100- 135 SECTION 26 5100 Copyright 2017 by KLUSER, INC.; All Rights Reserved LIGHTING 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain field conditions within manufacturer's required service conditions during and after installation. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 0178 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LUMINAIRE TYPES A. Furnish products as specified below. B. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements, except where individual luminaire types are designated with substitutions not permitted. C. Type A: 4' LED Wall Mount Strip. 1. Products: a Philips LEDALITE - 7408LBGQN. b. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2. Housing: Steel, silver. 3. Nominal Length: 4 feet. 4. Lamp(s): One -26W LED. a. Correlated Color Temperature: 3,500 K. 5. Voltage: Universal 120-277 V. 6, Mounting: Wall. 2.02 LUMINAIRES A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable. C. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. D. Provide products complying with Federal Energy Management Program (FEMP) requirements. E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets, ballasts, reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize and protect the lamp and distribute the light. F. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, hardware, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system. G. Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without any damage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc. K LED Luminaires: 1, Components: UL 8750 recognized or listed as applicable. 2. Tested in accordance with IES LM -79 and IES LM -80. 3. LED Estimated Useful Life: Minimum of 50,000 hours at 70 percent lumen maintenance, calculated based on IES LM -80 test data. PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 265100-136 SECTION 26 5100 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved LIGHTING I. LED Luminaire Components: UL 8750 recognized or listed as applicable. 2.03 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS A. Description: Emergency lighting units complying with NFPA 101 and all applicable state and local codes, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 924. B. Operation: Upon interruption of normal power source or brownout condition exceeding 20 percent voltage drop from nominal, solid-state control automatically switches connected lamps to integral battery power for minimum of 90 minutes of rated emergency illumination, and automatically recharges battery upon restoration of normal power source. C. Battery: 1. Sealed maintenance -free lead calcium unless otherwise indicated. 2. Size battery to supply all connected lamps, including emergency remote heads where indicated. D. Diagnostics: Provide power status indicator light and accessible integral test switch to manually activate emergency operation. E. Provide low -voltage disconnect to prevent battery damage from deep discharge. F. Accessories: 1. Provide compatible accessory mounting brackets where indicated or required to complete installation. 2. Provide compatible accessory high impact polycarbonate vandal shields where indicated. 3. Provide compatible accessory wire guards where indicated. 4. Where indicated, provide emergency remote heads that are compatible with the emergency lighting unit they are connected to and suitable for the installed location. 2.04 BALLASTS AND DRIVERS A. Manufacturers: 1. General Electric Company/GE Lighting: www,gelighting.com. 2. Osram Sylvania: www.sylvania.com. 3. Philips Lighting Electronics/Advance: wrww.advance.philips.com. 4. Universal; www.unvlt.com 5. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 6. Manufacturer Limitations: Where possible, for each type of luminaire provide ballasts produced by a single manufacturer. 7. Where a specific manufacturer or model is indicated elsewhere in the luminaire schedule or on the drawings, substitutions are not permitted unless explicitly indicated. B. All Ballasts: 1. Provide ballasts containing no polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs). 2. Minimum Efficiency/Efficacy: Provide ballasts complying with all current applicable federal and state ballast efficiency/efficacy standards. C. Dimmable LED Drivers: 1. Dimming Range: Continuous dimming from 100 percent to one percent relative light output unless dimming capability to lower level is indicated, without flicker. 2. Control Compatibility: Fully compatible with the dimming controls to be installed. 3. Product(s): PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 26 51 00 -137 SECTION 26 5100 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC,; All Rights Reserved LIGHTING a. Lutron Hi-Lume (L3D0-Series): 3 -wire and digital control; 0.1 percent dimming with Soft -On and Fade -to -Black low end performance. b. Lutron Hi-Lume A -Series (LTE -Series): Forward phase (neutral wire required); one percent dimming. c. Lutron Hi-Lume A -Series (1_3D -Series): 3 -wire and digital control; one percent dimming. d. Lutron EcoSystem H -Series (LDE1-Series): Digital control; one percent dimming with Soft - On and Fade -to -Black low end performance. 2.05 LAMPS A. Manufacturers: 1. General Electric Company/GE Lighting: www.gelighting.com, 2. Osram Sylvania: www.sylvania.com. 3. Philips Lighting Company: www.lighting.philips.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements, 5. Manufacturer Limitations: Where possible, provide lamps produced by a single manufacturer. B. Lamps - General Requirements: 1. Unless explicitly excluded, provide new, compatible, operable lamps in each luminaire. 2. Verify compatibility of specified lamps with luminaires to be installed. Where lamps are not specified, provide lamps per luminaire manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Minimum Efficiency: Provide lamps complying with all current applicable federal and state lamp efficiency standards. 4. Color Temperature Consistency: Unless otherwise indicated, for each type of lamp furnish products which are consistent in perceived color temperature. Replace lamps that are determined by the Architect/Engineer to be inconsistent in perceived color temperature. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings. B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly sized to accommodate conductors in accordance with NFPA 70. C. Verify that suitable support frames are installed where required. D. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to luminaires. E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. F. Examine substrate and supporting grids for luminaires. G. Examine each fixture to determine suitability for lamps specified. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes. PROJECT NO, 17-210-1103 26 51 00 -138 SECTION 26 5100 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved LIGHTING 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 37 as required for installation of luminaires provided under this section. B. Install products according to manufacturer's instructions. C. Install luminaires securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1 (general workmanship), NECA 500 (commercial lighting), and NECA 502 (industrial lighting). D. Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent luminaires. E. Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on reflected ceiling plan. F. Install wall mounted luminaires, emergency units and exit signs at height as indicated on Drawings and directed in the field by Architect. Obtain final approval from Architect prior to commencement of this portion of work. G. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire. H. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature conditions within luminaire. I. Wail -Mounted Luminaires: Unless otherwise indicated, specified mounting heights are to center of luminaire. J. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire. K. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. L. Emergency Lighting Units: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, connect unit to unswitched power from same circuit feeding normal lighting in same room or area. Bypass local switches, contactors, or other lighting controls. M. Install lamps in each luminaire. N. Lamp Burn -in: Operate lamps at full output for prescribed period per manufacturer's recommendations prior to use with any dimming controls. Replace lamps that fail prematurely due to improper lamp burn -in. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each product for damage and defects. B. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection to verify proper operation. C. Test self -powered exit signs, emergency lighting units, and fluorescent emergency power supply units to verify proper operation upon loss of normal power supply. D. Correct wiring deficiencies and repair or replace damaged or defective products. Repair or replace excessively noisy ballasts as determined by Architect/Engineer. E. Energy Code Commissioning: The electrical contractor shall program, test, calibrate and confirm the proper operation and placement of all lighting controls in accordance with the International Energy Code, 2012 Edition Paragraph C408.3 "Lighting system functional testing" PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 26 51 00 -139 SECTION 26 5100 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved LIGHTING 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Aim and position adjustable luminaires to achieve desired illumination as indicated or as directed by Architect/Engineer, Secure locking fittings in place. B. Aim and position adjustable emergency lighting unit lamps to achieve optimum illumination of egress path as required or as directed by Architect/Engineer or authority having jurisdiction. C. Relamp luminaires which have failed lamps at completion of work. 3.06 CLEANING A. Clean surfaces according to NECA 500 (commercial lighting), NECA 502 (industrial lighting), and manufacturer's instructions to remove dirt, fingerprints, paint, or other foreign material and restore finishes to match original factory finish. 3.07 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. See Section 0178 00 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals. B. Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of luminaires to Architect/Engineer, and correct deficiencies or make adjustments as directed. C. Just prior to Substantial Completion, replace all lamps that have failed. D. Project record documents: Accurately record location of each luminaire. 3.08 PROTECTION A. Protect installed luminaires from subsequent construction operations. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 17-210-1103 265100-140 SECTION 2$ 5100 Copyright 2017 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved LIGHTING ATTACHMENT C VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK BUTLER GOVERNMENT CENTER LOWER LEVEL RESTROOM RENOVATIONS PROJECT ATTACHMENT C LIST OF DRAWINGS DATE LAST SHEET NOS. SHEET TITLES REVISED G100 Cover Sheet, General Notes, Symbols & Drawing Index 09/15/2017 G201 Accessibility & Mounting Information 09/15/2017 A310 Floor Plans and Reflecting Ceiling Plans 09/15/2017 A800 Room Finish Schedule 09/15/2017 A900 Interior Elevations 09/15/2017 MEP310 Floor Plans — Government Center 09/15/2017 -1- VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK BUTLER GOVERNMENT CENTER LOWER LEVEL RESTROOM RENOVATIONS PROJECT ATTACHMENT D SPECIAL PROJECT REQUIREMENTS 1. Contractor shall have five (5) years of experience which is comparable in type and scope to this project. 2. Work hours are 7:00 a.m. to 4:30 p.m. Monday through Friday. Any deviation is subject to the approval of the Village representative. 3. The project will be done on consecutive work days, excluding weekends and holidays observed by the Village, until completed, delays only to inclement weather. 4. Contractor is required to obtain all necessary permits from the Village of Oak Brook, and schedule required inspections through Community Development. 5, The Contractor shall supply to the Village, phone numbers where he/she can be reached after normal working hours. ti. The Contractor must submit all manufacturers' literature on all materials that will be used on this project, including M.S.D.S. (Material Safety Data Sheets) prior to any work beginning. 7. A storage location for supplies, ladders and scaffolding shall be mutually agreed upon between the Village and the contractor before any material is stored on site. The Contractor must deliver material with manufacturers labels intact and legible, store material on raised platforms and cover material with protective covering. 8. Before work is started, Contractor must deliver to the job site sufficient material to complete the project. 9. if a dumpster is required, the location of the dumpster placement shall be mutually agreed upon between the Village and the contractor. 10. All ladders and scaffolding shall be maintained in prior working order during the course of this project and shall be secured at the end of each workday. 11. Contractor must provide barricades to ensure that falling debris will not injure anyone, and to prevent public access to the work area at all times. Yellow "CAUTION" tape will ATTACHMENT D be placed below the immediate work areas of laborers and scaffolds to warn the public of people working overhead. 12. At all times, Contractor must keep the work and storage areas in a clean, orderly, and a picked up manner, to prevent debris from blowing. Clean adjoining streets and immediate vicinity at the end of each work day. Sidewalks, windowsills, roofs and other work areas will be broom swept to remove all debris. Daily material and debris not placed into dumpster will be removed from the site. 13. Upon completion of the project the work area shall be cleaned. All debris and remaining material and supplies shall be removed from the jobsite, including the dumpster within 72 hours of completion. 14. Upon completion the Contractor shall supply a one year warranty covering material and workmanship; contractor shall submit sample warranty with bid. VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK BUTLER GOVERNMENT CENTER LOWER LEVEL RESTROOM RENOVATIONS PROJECT APPENDIX 1 PREVAILING WAGES Prevailing Wage rates for DuPage County effective Sept. 1, 2017 Trade Title Region Type Class Base Fore- M -F OSA OSH H1W Pension Vacation Training Wage man 07 Wage ASBEST05 ABT -GEN ALL ALL 41.20 42.20 1.5 1.5 2 14.65 12.32 0.00 0.50 ASBEST05 ABT -MEC ALL BLD 37.46 39.96 1.5 1.5 2 11.62 11.06 0.00 0.77 BOILERMAKER ALL BLD 48.49 52.86 2 2 2 6.97 19.61 0.00 0.90 BRICK MA50N ALL BLD 45.38 49.92 1.5 1.5 2 10.45 16.68 0.00 0.90 CARPENTER ALL ALL 46.35 48.35 1.5 1.5 2 11,79 18.157 0.00 0.63 CEMENT MASON ALL ALL 44.25 46.25 2 1.5 2 14.00 17.16 0.00 0.92 CERAMIC TILE FINISHER ALL BLD 37,81 37.81 1,5 1.5 2 10.55 10.12 0.00 0.65 COMMUNICATION TECH ALL BLD 33.00 35.40 1.5 1.5 2 10.10 17,19 2.07 0.61 ELECTRIC PWR EQMT OP ALL ALL 37.89 51AB 1.5 1.5 2 5.00 11.75 0.00 0.38 ELECTRIC PWR EQMT OP ALL HWY 41.45 56.38 1.5 1.5 2 530 12.87 0.00 0.73 ELECTRIC PWR GRNDMAN ALL ALL 29.30 51.48 1.5 1.5 2 5.00 9.09 0.00 0.29 ELECTRIC PWR GRNDMAN ALL HWY 32.00 56.38 1.5 1.5 2 5.50 9.92 0.D0 0.66 ELECTRIC PWR LINEMAN ALL ALL 45.36 51.48 1.5 1.5 2 5.00 14.06 0.00 0.45 ELECTRIC PWR LINEMAN ALL HWY 49.67 56.38 1.5 1.5 2 5.50 15.40 0.00 O.BB ELECTRIC PWR TRK DRV ALL ALL 30.34 51.4B 1.5 1.5 2 5.00 9,40 0.00 0.30 ELECTRIC PWR TRK DRV ALL HWY 33.14 56,38 1.5 1.5 2 5.50 10.29 O.DO 0,59 ELECTRICIAN ALL BLD 39.26 43.26 1.5 1.5 2 12.35 22.08 4.93 0.68 ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTOR ALL BLD 51.94 58.43 2 2 2 14.43 14.96 4.16 0.90 FENCE ERECTOR NE ALL 39.58 41.58 1.5 1.5 2 13.40 13.90 0.00 0.40 FENCE ERECTOR W ALL 45.06 46.66 2 2 2 10.52 20.76 0.00 0.70 GLAZIER ALL BLD 42AS 43.95 1.5 1.5 2 14.04 20.14 0.00 0.94 HT/FROST INSULATOR ALL BLD 50.50 53.DO 1.5 1.5 2 12.12 12.96 0.00 0.72 IRON WORKER E ALL 47.33 49.33 2 2 2 14.15 22.39 0.00 0.35 IRON WORKER W ALL 45.61 49.25 2 2 2 11,52 22.65 0.00 0B1 LABORER ALL ALL 41.20. 41.95 1,5 1.5 2 14,65 12.32 0.00 0.50 LATHER MACHINIST MARBLE FINISHERS MARBLE MASON MATERIAL TESTER I MATERIALS TESTER II MILLWRIGHT OPERATING ENGINEER OPERATING ENGINEER OPERATING ENGINEER OPERATING ENGINEER OPERATING ENGINEER OPERATING ENGINEER OPERATING ENGINEER OPERATING ENGINEER OPERATING ENGINEER OPERATING ENGINEER OPERATING ENGINEER OPERATING ENGINEER OPERATING ENGINEER OPERATING ENGINEER OPERATING ENGINEER ORNAMNTL IRON WORKER ORNAMNTL IRON WORKER PAINTER PAINTER SIGNS PILEDRIVER PIPEFITTER PLASTERER PLUMBER ALL ALL 2 46.35 ALL BLD 1.5 45.35 ALL ALL 8.95 33.95 ALL BLD 2 44.63 ALL ALL 1.5 31,20 ALL ALL 16-28 36.20 ALL ALL 2 46.35 ALL BLD 1 50.10 ALL BLD 2 48.80 ALL BLD 3 46.25 ALL BLD 4 44.50 ALL BLD 5 53.85 ALL BLD 6 51.10 ALL BLD 7 53.10 ALL FLT 14.35 38.00 ALL HWY 1 48.30 ALL HWY 2 47,75 ALL HWY 3 45.70 ALL HWY 4 44.30 ALL HWY 5 43.10 ALL HWY 6 51.30 ALL HWY 7 49.30 E ALL 1.5 46.75 W ALL ALL ALL ALL 8 L ALL ALL ALL BLD ALL BLD ALL BLD 48.35 47,85 33.95 49.09 31.20 36.20 48.35 54.10 54.10 54.10 54.10 54.10 54.10 54.10 38.00 52.30 52.30 52.30 52.30 5230 52.30 5230 49-25 45.06 48.66 44.18 46.18 37.45 42.05 46.35 48.35 47.50 50.50 42.75 45.31 49-25 : 52.20 1.5 1.5 2 11.79 18,67 0.00 1.5 1.5 2 7.26 8.95 1.85 1.5 1.5 2 10.45 15.52 0.00 1.5 1.5 2 10.45 16-28 0,00 1.5 1.5 2 14.65 12.32 0.00 1.5 1.5 2 14.65 1232 0.00 1,5 1.5 2 11.79 18.87 0.00 2 2 2 18,80 14.35 2.00 2 2 2 18.80 1435 2.00 2 2 2 18.80 14.35 2.00 2 2 2 18,80 14.35 2.00 2 2 2 18.80 14.35 2.00 2 2 2 18.80 14.35 2,00 2 2 2 18.80 14.35 200 1.5 1.5 2 18.05 13.60 1.90 1.5 1.5 2 18.80 1435 2.00 1.5 1.5 2 18,80 14.35 2.00 1.5 1.5 2 1880 14.35 2,00 1.5 1.5 2 11180 1435 2.00 1,5 1.5 2 18.80 14.35 2.00 1.5 1.5 2 18.80 14,35 200 1.5 1,5 2 18.80 14.35 200 2 2 2 13.90 19.79 0100 2 2 2 10,52 2036 0.00 1.5 1.5 1.5 10.30 1.5 1.5 2 2.60 1.5 1.5 2 11.79 1.5 1,5 2 9,55 1.5 1,5 2 14,00 1.5 1.5 . 2 14.34 0.63 0.00 0.47 0.59 0.50 0.5o 0.63 1.30 1,30 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.30 0.75 0.70 6.20 0.00 1.35 3.18 0.00 0.00 18.87 0.00 0.63 17,85 0,00 2.07 1531 0,00 0.89 13.35 0.00 1.28 ROOFER ALL BLD 42.30 45.30 1.5 1.5 2 9.08 12.14 0.00 0.58 SHEETMETAL WORKER ALL BLD 45,77 47.77 1.5 1.5 2 10.65 14.10 0-00 0.82 SPRINKLER FITTER ALL BLD 47.20 49.20 1.5 1.5 2 12.25 11.55 0.00 0.55 STEEL ERECTOR E ALL 42.07 44.07 2 2 2 13AS 19.59 0.00 0.35 STEEL ERECTOR W ALL 45.06 48.66 2 2 2 10.52 20.76 0.00 0.70 STONE MASON ALL BLD 45.38 49.92 1.5 1-5 2 10.45 16,68 0.00 0.90 TERRAZZO FINISHER ALL OLD 40.54 40.54 1.5 1.5 2 10.65 12,76 ODO 0-73 TERRAZ20 MASON ALL BLD 44.38 47.88 1.5 1.5 2 10.65 14.15 0.00 0.02 TILE MASON ALL BLD 38.56 38.56 1.5 1.5 2 10.65 11.18 0.00 0.68 TRAFFIC SAFETY WRKR ALL HWY 33,50 35.10 1.5 1.5 2 8.10 7.62 0.00 0.25 TRUCK DRIVER ALL ALL 1 36.30 36.85 1.5 1.5 2 8.10 9,76 0.00 0.15 TRUCK DRIVER ALL ALL 2 36.45 36.85 1.5 1.5 2 8,10 9.76 0.00 0.15 TRUCK DRIVER ALL ALL 3 36.65 36.85 1-5 1.5 2 8.10 9.76 0.00 0.15 TRUCK DRIVER ALL ALL 4 36.85 36,85 1.5 1.5 2 8.10 9.76 0.00 0.15 TUCKPOINTER ALL BLD 44.17 45.17 1.5 1.5 2 10.45 15.04 0.00 0.88 M-FOT Unless otherwise noted, CYT pay is required for any hour greater than 8 worked each day, Mon through Fri. The number listed is the multiple of the base wage - O6 O"time pay required for every hour worked on 5sturdays CEH Omilme pay required for e% r hour worked on 9ndays and Holidays WW Heaithl Welfare benefit b0arations DlP/GEODUNTY iFM WpfKF;SAND FE NCEER13:7OFt(Wi3T) -Wed of Fbute 53. The iollowi n8 list is dared as those days for which holiday rimes of wages for work perfvmyed apply. New Years Day, Memorizi Day, Fours h of J.rly, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day and Vete, s Day in some dassiications cc)unties Generdly, any of these holidayswNch fall on a Snday is celebreted on the fallowing Monday. 'Nsthen rrlakes work performed on that Monday payable at the appropriateomlima ratefor holiday pay, Oxn on practice in a given local may after aatan days of odebrzion. Kin doubt, please dedc with lDC L ASSIEMCJS- Cl3AL.- narnnoval of asbestos materiall mold and ha mrdous materialsfrom any place In a building, including n're tmicd WAuns wherethoEBme&wicalWgem amtoberemoved. 7NsindudestheremovMofadxgtosmaterials(mcddand hzzwdousmeterialsfran ductwork or pipes in a building when the building is to be demolished at the time or at sRhme clow f uture dale. A 93ESrOS- M BCFMCAL- removal of asbestos material from mechanical sygeM such as pipes, ducts, and boilers, where the mechanical sAarrisereto rernain. TR*RCSAFEfY-work mated with barrimdM harms and drums used to reduoe lane usage on highway worm the installation and rerr oM of temporary lane markings and the installation and removal of temporary road sighs CEWAICTILEFINSIER The grouting, dung, and polishing of 61 dassesof tile, whether for interior or exterior purposes; atl burned, glazed or unglazed products all composition materials, grarrti tte tiles warning delectable tiles, cement tiles, epoxy composite materials, pavers, glass, mosaic, fiber's and all substitute materials, for tole made in the -like units all mMunm in the lila: form of oemWd, metals, arnd other materials UvA are for and intended for use as afinished floor surface, stair thea% promenade roof%walks, walK aeil€r% swimming pools, and all other places where tile isto form a finished Interior or exterior, The mi)dngof all salting a*Aarsinduding but riot lirnited tothin-sd mortem epmderk wall mud, and any other sand and cetTwd mixturesor adhesvwwhen used In the preparation, installation, repair, or maintenance of the andror similar materials The (handling and unloading of ail sand, oement, lime, tile, fiudures, equipment, adhesives, or any other materialsto be used In the preparation, installation, repair, or maintenance of the arbor sirni lar materials. Clararnic nle Fn€aln os shall fill all joirdsand voids regardless of mel tile work particularly and especially after installation of said the work Application of any and all protective coverings to all types of the installations including, but not be limited to, all sap compounds, paper produces, tapes, and all polyethylene coverings, plywood, m®nite, cardboard, and any new type of produclsthal maybe used to protect the installations, Bastracequipr o t, and all floor scarifying equipment used inpreparing floorstoreceive tile. The dean upend nemovalofall waste and mat erials. All damolitionofexistirgtHefloors andwells to be re -tiled. CAM M UNICATICINSTEO-ROAN Low voltage installation, maintenance and removal of teleoommunication fadlitles(voim round, data" video) including telephone and data Inside wire, interconnect, terrrdnal equipment, central offices, PA13K fiber optic cable and equipment, micro waves, V -,AT, bypeass, CATV, WAN (Wd a aea networks), LAN (hod area netwaft), and IMN (integrated system dual network), pulling of wire in raoew A but not the installation of raceways, MADE Fi NigiBZ Lraclirng and urtoadi ng muc(A distribution of all mitehials(ail stone, sand, etc,), stocking of floorswith matrhfial, perforrning all rigging for heavy work the handling of ell material that maybe needed for the insti lation of such material4 building of sm(folding, polishing if needed, patching, wadng of materialif darmaged, pointing up, aulkirg, grouting and deaningof marble, holding water on diamond or Qrborundum biadeor saw for setters cutting, use of tub saw or any other saw needed for preparation of material, drilling of holes for winesthat ancfhor materiai ssi by setters mixing up of molding plaster for installation of material, mi dug up thin set for the installation of material, mixing up of sand to oement for the installation of material and such other work as maybe required in helping a Marble &Iter in the handling of ail material in the erection or installation of interior marble, slate, travertine, art marble, serpentine, aiberehe stone, blue stone, granite and other stanes(meaning alo stone any foreign or domestic meterialsas are specified and used in building interiors and exteriors and customarily known as stone in the trade), carrara, sanionyx, vdrolite and sin filar opaque glas and the laying of ail marble tile, term tile, slate the and precast tile, steps, risers treads, base, or any other maleriaisthat maybe used as subslitutesfor any of the eforerriention3d msterialsand which are used on interior and exterior which we installed in a similar manner. MATERPLTESrERI: Hand caring and drilling for testing of maulerials; field inspection of uncured concrete and asphadt. MATENALTESI 11: Field Inspection of welds` structural steel, fireproofing, rnasunry, sail, facade, reinforcing steel, fonTmurk cued concrete, and concrete and asphalt batch plants, adjusting proporliom of bituminous miftres GFEWT1NG B NEER- BUILDING Oars 1. Asphalt Raul; Anhalt treader; Autogl ate; Bacdhoeswifh (aismn Attachment; Batch Ram; Berhoto (requires Two Engineers); Boiler and Throttle Valve; Q isson RX Cbntral Iadi-M ix Flant; combination Bade Foe Front End -loader Machine; Ocrivress r and Throttle Valve; Concrete Breaker (Turk Mounted); Cbnaete Cbnveyor; Cbnorete Qyw yor(Tnuck Mounted); Concrete Paver Over 27Ecu. fl; Concrete Fbhw 27Eeu. ft. and Linder: Concrete Placer. Cbn"e Racing Boom; (bnorele Pump (Truck Mounted); Cbncrete Tamer, oars, Ali; oaf Hwrenerhead; Uahes, (GO and errdlar 7W*); CTeter Crane; Sider pane; C?us her, Sone, eth.; Derricks, Al; Darrld6, Tra,reling; Fomh m Curb and Cutter Machine; Grader, Berating Grouting Machines; Heavy Duly W AvOledTransporter or Prkm Mover, Hghlift 9hovelsor Front Ehdloader 21/4 yd. aid over, Hoists, Bevatom outside type rack and pinion and similar machinehk Hoists, One, Two and Three Drum;- HdsI4 Two Tugger One Hour, Hydraulic BajdxxM I-Wraulic Boom Trudy Hydro Vao(arnd similar equipment); LoaxwAives, All; Motor Patrol; Lubrication Technican; Maripulatom f lie Drivers and Skid Fag; Fbst Hole Digger; Phe-aress Machine; Pump Utes U" ib m; Plurm Cretex Sueaw Uete&Sn w Type PurrVs, Gypsum EUker and Plump; Rai sad and Blind Hole Drill; Foto Mill Cinder, Scoops- Tractor Drawn; Sip -Form Pbr,+a; 3raddle Buggies; Clperation of Tie lack Machine; Tournapull; Tractor with Boom and Ste Boom; Trencoing Madhirum 08%2- Boilers; Boom, All Flow Propelled; Bulldog Concrete Mixer(Tmo Rand Over y, Oxweyor, FlUrtable; Fbridift Truces Fighlift S*4e s or Front 6hdloadws under 21/4 yd.; HDlsis, A Aamatic; Hoists, Inside Sevntors� Hoists, S W Dragging Machine; hoists, TuWar Single Drum; Eater Ryeed; Fbdk Drill (3?lf-Ropelled); Fick Dill (Truck Mounted); Fbllehs, All; Sean Generators, TraQorr All; Tractor Drawn Vibratory Fblier; Winch Truc kswith "A" Frame. Clamss& Air Cbrmpressor, Cbrnbim-llon &nal Equiprrani Operator, Generators Heater'A Met#ti21nicA,1-1101sts, In4e l3evgors(renrodelingor renovation work); H drauetic.R wer Units(RleDriving, SGrerfing, and Drilling); Rjmps, over 3" (1 to 3 not toexcncd atotal of "ft.}; Lor Boys lumps, Well %rM Welding MacNne5(2through 5); Windier, 4 &nail 6ectric Drill Winches ❑ass 4. Bobcats ardor other 9cdd Seer loaders, Oilers aid Wick Forklift. Classy, Assistant O -aft Foreman. Class 6. G Tadd I. Clam T Medhahics; Welders OfSF?ATINGl3QNEEFG-1 GLWAYCCNSRJE,"1'l0N Clams 1. Asphalt Rant; Asphdt Hagar aid Raner Combination; Asphalt Hager Scarf ire, Amt Spreader; Auiograderf GOMA00 or other smiler type machines APGRawr; B a* hoeswith OissonAltachment; Ballad Regulator; Belt loader; fisson Rgs; Cor pumper; CTantrai Rd-MixFlard; Ownbination 83ddhoe ROM loader Macthine, (1 cat. yd. Backhoe BudQA or over or with a ltacrnents): Concrete Bremer (Truck Mounted); Concrete Oxhveyw; Cbmwete Paver over 27Ear. ft.; Qn rete Raoir; Qncrele Tube Float; Ovines all attachments Danes, Tower owlesof all iYies Outer O'ene: Spites Gram, Cruist r, &one, etc; Derricks All; Derrick Bods Derrida$ Trarding; Dreclges Bevhtom Outside type ieck & Rnlon and Smilar Machines Formless Curb and GLtter Machine; Grader, Elevating, Gradcr, Motor Grader, Motu Palnol, Auto Ratrd, Form Grader, Rill Grader, ,%bgrader; Guard FSI Fbst Driver Truck Mounted; Foists, One, Two and Three Drum; Haary Duty 80421ropelled Transporter or Prime Mover, Hy*aulic Baedhoes Backhoeswith sitear attachmentsup to 44' of boom rem; Lubrication Tednidan; Manipuladom MudBng Machine; Re Drivers and Skid Rg; Pr&Srem Machirw, R np O'etes Dual lam; F;bdk Drill - CYawler or &W Ag; Rx k Drill - Truck Mounted, FbcWTrack Tamper; Foto Mill Grinder: Sip -Form Rte; &how Metiers, Sal Tell Drill Egg (Truck Mounted); Rraiddle Buggies Hydraulic Telesimping Form (Tunnel); Operation of Tieback Machine: Tractor Drawn Belt Loader; Tractor Drawn Belt loader (with attached pushier - two engineers); Tractor with Boom; Tractaire with Alla& nerrts TraiflcBarier Trate Machine; Trenching; Truck Mounted 0orwete Rimp with HDorm. Fbsed or hind Hole Drills (Tunnel Shaft); Underground Boring andlor Mining Machines 5 ft, in dimer and over tunnel, etq lJndergrourd Boring ardlor Mining Madhinasurder 5 ft. in diameter. Mod 6aavator; Widener(APS33). Class 2. Bcdn Rant; lltuurunous Mbw,, Boiler and throttle Valve; Bullciamrs, Oar lnacler Trailing (bnviWsr 0ahmbination Badkhoe From loader Machlno (Lamthan 1 w. yd. Badktme Budk& or over or with attadhments); Compressor and bottle Vaive; Oompressior, (rmman fbaeiver (3); Concrete Err dw or Hydro Hammer, Cbnc ele Grinding M adhlne; QwuGte Ml)2r Or Pauer 751aiesto and inducing 27 cu. ft., Clete treader; Concrete Curing Machine, Bxisp Machine, Betting Machine and Scaling Machin,% Cie Wfneel Saw; Cbnveyior Muds Cis (Haglund or Smiles Type); Drills; All; Finisivng Machine- (bncrete; "ghlift gmvelsor Front Endloader, hoist - Smer Dreggrxl Machirne; Hydraulic Eioom Trudks(Ail Attadhrriants); Hydro -Blaster; Hydro Eamatirg (excluding hosework); Lir Screed; All Loahrrotives Dinky; O[f-Fdaad FFe<ling lhnits(irhduding artik�lating) Non �If Loading FeQian Dump; Pump Qfdes � [}etas- 9�rew Type Plumps, QA)s on Uker and Rurrv; Fblier, Asphalt; fmtey Show Flows lbtotiller, S9amah, etc, self-propelled; SO-Propelled mor; 813reada - Chip - 3one, etc; 872per - Sngle[Twin Engine(FLsh aid Rll; Scraper - Rime Mover in Tandem (legadlessof Sze), Traaors pulling attactrnwt$ 9heepsF0ot, Dis4 Oxnpador, etc; Tug Boats Class 3_ Boilers; Brown, All Fbwer Rvopelled; C kni rt Sipply Tom; ODmpressor, Cxry non Pbosiver (2): Concrete Mi>8r (Two and ); Cbnvpryor, f�rtable; FamrType TractorsUmd for Mowing, 5aeding, etc; Forlditl Tnrcks Grouting Machine; Foists, Automatic; Hoists, All Bevators; Hoists, Tugger Single Drum; ,W Diggers, low Bays Rpe ,lacking Madhinesc Fbst iWe Digger; Power Jnr, 0morele Rhwer Driven; Rig Mills, Fbilers other than Asphalt; Smd anal 3raw Bower; Sean t3eraretors; Sump Machine; Winch Trudkswith "A" I=ran_ Work Boats Tamper-Fane-M otor Driven. Class* Air{bmpressor; Combination-Small Equiprrhern{ Operator, Directional axing Machine; Caheratoors, Heaters, Mocha icai; Hydraulic Fbwer Lki t (File DrivInQ Sdrnacting, or pilling); Light Rants All (1 through 5}; Rimps over 3" (t to 3 not to exceed a total of 300 ft.); Pump Well Pbirrts VackA n Trucks(eduding hcaq work); Welding Marhines(2 through 5); V*KtNA 4 Small Bedric grill Wirdes Class 5. Sdd3eer Umder (all); We k Fbddihs Oilers Class 6. Field Mechanics and Heid Welders Claus 7. Dowell Madhinewith Air Cbmpr r; G'adalt and rnachines of like nature. OFER TING 9JO N R- NL ATING Diver. Diver Wal Tender, Diver Tender, FEN Rlot, FOV Tender TRLKX MMR BUILDING HEAVYAND HG-WAYCONSTRUC7ION Class 1. Two or three Anile Trucks Xfrane Truck when used for lransponation purposM Air Compressors and Welding Mac Ines; indudjng Ihose pulled by cars, pick-up trucks and tractors Arrnbulahoes; Batch Cie Lnceers EWc h Hopperman; Car and Trude WASCgh ry alis; Fork l�fisandFbistetsFIdpers, MechanicsHelpeksandGre2earsOilUstribLAors2-nmoperation; BreakersPbieTrailer, upto40feet; Fbwar Mower Tradors elf-propelled (NP Spreader, SdPmar, Surry Trucks, 2-man operation; Surry Truck Conveyor Operation, 2 or 3 man; Tearrsiem Urddlled Mrnprnan; and Truck Drivers hauling warning lights barricades, and portable toilelson the job site. Clam 2. Four ande trucks Dump amts and Adgelors under 7 yards Rxnpsters, Track TTLdA Euclids, Hug Bottom Mmp Tumapulls or Turnatrailers when pulling other than self -loading equipment or similar equipment under 16 cubic yards Mixer Tnxfks under 7 yeards Feady- mix Rant hopper Gator, and Wi nch TnK*A 2 Andes. Oars 3. Five aode trLdLN Dump amts and A,dVGm 7 yards and over; Durnpsters Track TrudQ Eudids, Hug Bottom Dump Turnatrailers or turnapullswhan pulling other than self -loading equipment or similar equipment over 16 cubic yards Ec#os� ardor piisso n Materiel Trucks Mixer Trucks 7 yards or over; Mobile Qarrashuhlle in transit; Oil Distributors 1 -mai operation; Fble Trailer, over 40 feet; Fble and fundable Trailers hading material over 50feai long; Burrytrucks, 1 -man operation; Windhtruc;, 3 a lesor more; Medhanio-Trudk Welder and Truck F'airner. 08ss4. 9xaWe tn>dcg Duel -purpose vehicles; such as mourned aane trudkswith hoist and accessories; Foreman; Mahler Meohanic� &ff- loading eghipmsnt fixe REL and trucks with scoops on the front. The handling of sand, c a nern, marble chips and all other materials that maybe used by the Mosaic Terrace Mechem ik; and the mipng, grinding, grouting, dear►ing and seeding of ail Marble, Mosaic, and Twr=work floors, base, stairs, and wainscoting by hand or machine, and in addition, assislirgand aiding Marble, Masonic, and Tem Mechanics Other Qassificationsof Work For definhionsof loss idions not otherwise set out, the Department generally hason file sxih definitions which are avaliabie. ff a task to be performed is not s,4ed to one of the dassifications of pay set out, the Department will upon being contacted state which neighboriy ng manl has suoih a das9fication and provide such rate, such rate being deemed to exist by reference in this doo�n, 9 no neighboring county rate applies to the task, the Depertmerrt shall unclertake a special germination, such special determinatim being then deerned to have existed under thisdeterrnination. ff a project requires these, or arty ciasalf}catiorn not listed, please aorta t IDDLA 217-782-1710 for wage ratesor darif caions Landsc aping work fallsunder the midst Ing classifications for laborer, oWal ing engineer and truck drhrar. The work perforn>ed by tandsVe planntsrnarn and larx scape laborer is covered by the existing classification of laborer. The work performed by larKiscaPeap"ors(regardiessof equiprneot used or itsse ae) is om md by the da�fic�ionsof op"ing engineer. The work performed by landarape truck drivers regardless of size of truck driven) is covered by the da�ssfic�lonsof truck driver. MATERALT=& MATERA-TESnRINS:E�TC)RIAND 11 Wtwittstanding the difference in the dassification title, the dasificedion entitled "Material Tester I" involvm the sane job duties asthe das9f cilion entitled "Material Tester/ Insector 1". Likewise, the dassfication entitled "Material Tesler II" irrvdvesthe same job dutiesastlte das9gcation entitled "Material Tester/1nwor i!". Libel mutu 6 Document A312 TM - 2010 SURETY Conforms with The American Institute of Architects AIA Document 312 Performance Bond 601927742 CONTUCTOR: SURETY: (Saw, legal status and address) (Nance, legal status and principal place of business) See Liner Lean Services, Inc. The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company 10611 $. Green Valley Drive 62 Maple Avenue Palos Hills, IL 60465 Keene, NH 03431 This document has Important legal consequences. ODneuketion with Malting Address far Notfces an attorney is alcoureW "� complellon or The Ohio Casualty insurance Company modfPosUonn.. OWNER: Attention: Surety Claims Department Any MVularndaren09to (Name, legal status and address) 1001 4th Avenue, Suite 17DD Contractor, Surety, twig of Village of Oak Brook Seattle, WA 98154 other party shalt be considered 1200 Oak Brook Road plural where applicable. Oak Brook, IL 60523 CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Date: November 13, 2017 Amount: $69,000.DD Description: (Name and location) Plumbing - Butter Government Center Low Level Restroom Renovation -1112 Oak Brook Road, Oak Brook, IL 60523 BOND Date. November 14, 2017 (Not earlier than Corrsiruction Contract Date) Amount: $69.DOQ.00 Modifications to this Bond: None See Section 16 CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: (Corporate Seal) Company: (Corporate Seal) CIA L,63ilPriCZr The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company Signa ® Signature: N d Title: C'ffrL/ Name an�� and Title: '�'� L Steven C. Kuykendall, Attomey-in-Fact (Any additional signatures appear on the last page of this Performance Bond) (FOR INFORMATION ONLY — Name. address and telephone) AGENT cx BROKER: OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE: 11M wi i 0tSr$i�CBtipn (Architect, Engineer or atherpaWj $50 E.Cerinel,Drive. Suite 32D Cermet,11hl 46032 _ :317-WI-7700 Pap 1 of 4 . § 1 The Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns to the Owner for the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference. § 2 If the Contme[or performs the Construction Contract, the Surety and the Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond, except when applicable to participate in a conference as provided in Section 3. § 3 If There is no Owner Default under the Construction Contract, the Surety's obligation under this Bond shall arise after .1 the Owner first provides notice to the Contractor and the Surety that the Owner is considering declaring a Contractor Default. Such notice shall indicate whether the Owner is requesting a conference among the Owner, Contractor and Surety to discuss the Contractor's performance. If the Owner does not request a conference, the Surety tray, within five (5) business days after receipt of the Owner's notice, request such a conference. If the Surety timely requests a conference, the Owner shall attend. Unless the Owner ggrees otherwise, any conference requested under this Section 3.1 shall be held within len (10) business days of the Surety's receipt .of the Owner's notice. If the Owner, the Contractor and the Surety agree, the Contractor shall be allowed a reasonable time to perform the Construction Contract, but such an agreement shall not waive the Owners right, if any, subsequently to declare a Contractor Default; .i the Owner declares a Contractor Dcfault, terminates the Construction Contract and notifies the Surety; and .3 the Owner has agreed to pay the Balance of the Contract Price in accordance with the terms of the Construction Contract to the Surety or to a contractor selected to perform the Construction Contract. § 4 Failure on the part of the Owner to comply with the notice requirement in Section 3.1 shall not constitute a failure to comply with a condition precedent to the Surety's obligations, or release the Surety from its obligations, except to the extent the Surety demonstrates actual prejudice. § 6 When the Owner has satisfied the conditions of Section 3, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety's expense take one of the following actions: § 6.1 Arrange for the Contractor, with the consent of the Owner, to perform and complete the Construction Contract; § 6.2 Undertake to perform and complete the Construction Contract itself, through its agents or independent contractors„ § 6.3 Orin bids or negotiated proposals from qualified contractors acceptable to the Owner for a contract for performance and completion of the Construction Contract, arrange for a contract to be prepared for execution by the Owner and a contractor selected with the Owner's concurrence, to be Secured with performance and payment bonds executed by a qualified surety equivalent to the bonds issued on the Construction Contract, and pay to the Owner the amount of damages as described in Section 7 in excess Of the Balance of the Contract Price incurred by the Owner as a result of the Contractor Default; or C 6.4 Waive its right to perform and complete, arrange for completion, or obtain a new contractor and with reasonable promptness under the ci rcum st 7nces; A After investigation, determine the amount for which it may be liable to the Owner and, as soon as practicable after the amount is determined, make payment to the Owner, or .2 Deny liability in whole or in pan and notify the Owner, citing the reasons for denial. § 6 If the Surety does not prTx=d as provided in Section 5 with reasonable promptness, the Surety shall be deemed to be in default on this Bond seven days atter receipt of an additional written notice from the Owner to the Surety demanding that the Surety perform its obligations under [his Bond, and the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. Ifthe Surety proceeds as provided in Section 5.9, and the Owner refuses the payment or the Surety has denied.liability, in whole or in part, without further notice the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. Page 2 of 4 § 7 if the Surety elects to act under Section 5.1.5.2 or 5.3, then the responsibilities of the Surety to the Owner shall not be greater than those of the Contractor under the Construction Contract, and the responsibilities of the Owner to the Surety shall not be mater than those of the Owner under the Construction Contract. Subject to the commitment by the Owner to pay the Balance of the Contract Price, the Surety is obligated, without duplication, for .I the responsibilities of the Contractor for correction of defective work and completion of the Construction Contruci, .2 additional legal, design professional and delay costs resulting from the Contractor's Default. and resulting from the actions or faiture to act of the Surety under Section 5; and 3 liquidated damages, or if no liquidated damages are specified in the Construction Contract, actual damages caused by delayed performance or non-performance of the Contractor, § 8 if the Surety elects to act under Section 5.1, 5.3 or 5.4, the Surety's liability is limited to the amount of this gond. 8 The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract, and the Balance of the Contract Price shall not be reduced or set off un account of any such unrelated obligations. No right of action shall accrue on this Bond to any person or entity other than the Owner or its heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns. § 10The Surety hereby waives notice ofanv change, including changes of time, to tine C,onsuuction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders and other obligations. § 11 Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond may be instituted in any court of competent jurisdiction in the location in which the work or part of the work is located and shall be instituted within two years after a declaration of Contractar Default or within two years after the Contractor ceased working or within two years after the Surety refuses or fails to perform its obligations under this Bond, whichever occurs first. if the provisions of this Paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable. § 12 Notice to the Surety, the Owner or the Contractor shall he mailed or delivered to the address shown on the page on which their signature appears. § 13 When this Gond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requitement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said s[atutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. § 14 Definitions § 14.1 Balance of the Contract Price, The total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract after all proper adjustments have been made, including allowance to the Contractor of any amounts received or to be received by the Owner in settlement of insurance or other claims for damages to which the Contractor is entitled, reduced by all valid and proper payments made to or on behal f of [hc Contractor under the Construction Contract. § 14.2 Construction Contract The agreement between the Owner and Conuactoe identified on the cover page, including; all Contract Documents and changes made to the agreement and the Contract ❑ocumcnt_w. § 14.3 Contractor Default. Failure of the Contractor, which has not been remedied or waived, to perform or otherwise to comply with a material term of the Construction Contract. § 14.4 Owner Default. Failure of the Owner, which has not been remedied or waived, to pay the Contractor as required under the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other material terms of the Construction Contract. § 14.5 Contract Documents. All the documents that comprise the agreement between the D -A mer and Contractor. § 15 If this Bond is issued for an agreement between a Contractor and subccmtractor, the term Contractor in this Bond shall be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner shall be deemed to be Contractor, § 16 Modifications to this bond are as follows: (Spae�t is provided below for additionalrignatarres ofadded parties, other than (rare appearing ort the cover page.) CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: (Corporate Seal) e4--XCompany: (Corporate Seal) Signature. ut N d Ti Sure: Address Name and Title: Address o0,4�� o Libel .y.SURETY Payment Bond CONTRACTOR: (Now lepl stave and address) See liner Lean Services, Inc. 40611 S. Green Valley Drive Parol Hills, IL 60465 OWNER. (Name, legal status and address) Village of Oak Brook 1200 Oak Brook Road Oak Brook, IL 60523 Document 312 T11 -2010 Conforms with The American Institute of Architects AIA Document 312 CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Date: November 13, 2017 Amount: S69,000.00 SURETY: 501127742 (Name, legal status and principat place of business) The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company 62 Maple Avenue Keene, NH 03431 Melling Address for Notices The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company Attention: Surety Claims Department 1001 4th Avenue, Suite 1700 Seattle, WA 98154 This document ha: impvUM 49al consequences. Consultation with an attomay Is w=uraped wijh respell to It$ com#Wijo i or modiltratlon. Any siNuiar to Contractor. Surety, OWW or other party and be consWered plural where eppilcable. Description: (Name and laeadan) Plumbing - Butler Govemment Center Low Level Restroom Renovation -1112 Oak Brock Road, Oak Brook, IL 60523 BOND Date: November 14, 2017 (Not earlier than Construction Contract Dare) Amount: $69,000.00 Modifications to this Bond: ® None ❑ Sce Section I8 CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: (Corporate Seat) Company: AV �jg r �q .., � The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company Seal) Nameture: I' Signature: r. . �� ['fr�-/�ii Nerve ANNEN ow and Title; and Title: 4'l>e Steven C. Kuykendall, Attorney -in ->'act (tiny odditional signatures appear on the dart page ofthis Payment Bond.) (FOR INFORAIA TION ONLY — Name. address and telephone) OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE: (Architect, Engineer or other pagy:) Pagel of i-1 § I The Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, sucxaessors and assigns to the OwMer to pay for labor, materials and equipment furnished for use in the perfannance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference, subject to the following terms. 12 Ifthe Contractor promptly makes payment of all sums due to Claimants, and defends, indemnifies and holds harntfess the Owner from claims, demands, liens or suits by any person or entity seeking payment for labor, materials or equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, then the Surety and the Contractor shall have no obligation tinder this Bond. § 3 if there is no Owner Default under the Construction Contract, the Surety's obligation to the Owner under this Bond shall arise after the Owner ilei promptly notified the Contractor and the Surety (a[ the address described in Section 13) of claims, demands, liens or suits against ilte Owner or the Owers property by any person or entity seeking payment For labor, materials or equipment furnished for use in the performance of the j Construction Contract and tendered defense of such claims, demands, liens or suits to the Contractor and the Surety. IE it 4 When the Owner has satisfied the conditions in Section 3, the Surety shaft promptly and at the Surety's expense defend, indemnify and hold hrumlem the Owner against a duly tendered claim, demand. lien or suit. § 15 'fire Surety's obligations to a Claimant under this Bond shall arise after the follo+wing § 5.1 Claimants, %who do not have a direct contract with the Contractor, .1 have furnished a written notice ofnon-payment to the Contractor, stating with substantial accuracy the amount claimed and the pante of the party to whom the materials were, or equipment was, furnished or supplied or for whom the labor was done or performed, within ninety (40) days after having last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment included in the Claim; and .2 have sent a Claim to the Surety (at the address described in Section 13). § 5.2 Claimants, who are employed by or have a direct contract wvith the Contractor, have sent a Claim to the Surety (at the address described in Section 13), § 6 if a notice of non-payment required by Section 5.1.1 is given by the Owner to the Contractor, that is sufficient to satisfy a Claimant's obligation to furnish a written notice of non-payment under Section 5.1.1. § 7 When a Claimant has satisfied the conditions of Sections 5.1 or 5.2, whichever is applicable, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety's expense take the following actions: § 7.1 Send an answer to the Claimant, with a copy to the Owner, within sixty (60) days after receipt of the Claim, stating the amounts that are undisputed and the basis for challenging any amounts that are disputed; and § 7.2 fay or arrange for payment of any undisputed amounts. § 7.3 The Surety's failure to discharge its obligations under Section 7.1 or Section 7.2 shall not be deemed to constitute a waiver of defenses the Surety of Contractor may have or acquire as to a Claim, except as to undisputed amounts for which the Surety and Claimant have reached agreement, If, however, the Surety (mils to discharge its obligations under Section 7.1 or Section 7.2, the Surety shall indemnify the Claimant for the reasonable attorney's fees the Claimant incurs thereafter to recover any sums found to be due and owing to the Claimant, § 6 The Surety's total obligation shall nut exceed the amount of this Bond, plus the amount of reasonable attomev's fees provides( under Section 7,3. and the amount of this Bond shall be credited for any payments made in good faith by the Surety. S ,Amounts owed by the CK"er to the Contractor under the Construction Contract shall be used for the performance of the Construction Contract and to satisfy claims, if any, under any construction performance bond, By the Contractor furnishing and the Owner accepting this Bond, they agree that all funds earned by the Contractor in the performance of the Construction Contract are dedicated to satisfy obligations of the Contractor turd Surety under this Bond, subject to the Owmer's priority to use the funds for the completion of the work. § 10 The Surely shah not be liable to the Owner, Claimants or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract - The Owner shalt not be liable for the payment of any costs or expenses of any Claimant under this Bond, and shall have under this Bond no obligation to make payments to, or give notice on behalf of, Claimants or otherwise have any obligations to Claimants under this Bond. I I The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders and other obligations. 12 No suit or action shall be commenced by a Claimant under this Bond other than in a cDurt of competent jurisdiction in the state in which the project that is the subject of the Construction Contract is located or after the expiration of ane year from the date (1) an which the Claimant sent a Claim to the Surety pursuant to Section 5.1.2 or 3?, or (2) on which the last Taber or service was perforated by anyone m the last materials or equipment were furnished by anyone under the Construction Contract, whichever of (l) or (2) First occurs, if the provisions ofthis PardMph are void pr prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable. 13 Htrtice and Claims to the Surety, the Owner or the Contractor shall he marled or delivered to the address shown on the page on which their signature appears. Actual receipt of notice or Claims, however accomplished, shalt he sufficient compliance as of the date received. § 14 When this Bond has beret furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be perfamred, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shalt be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions cemforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common lace bond. § 15 Upon request by any per'son or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of this Bond, the Contractor and Owner shall promptly furnish a copy of this Bond or shalt permit a copy to be made. § 16 Definitions § 16,1 Claim, A writ€en statement by the Claimant including at a minimum: .1 the name of the Claimant; .2 the name of the person for whom the labor was done, or materials or equipment furnished; .3 a copy of the agreement or purchase order pursuant to which laWr, materials or equipment was furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract; .i a brief description of the labor, materials or equipment furnished; .g the date on which the Claimant last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment for use in the performance of the Construction Contract .6 the total amount earned by the Claintartt for labor, materials or equipment furnished as o f the date of the Claim; .7 the total amount ofprevious payments received by the Claimant; and .8 the total amount due and unpaid to the Claimant for labor, materials or equipment furnished as of the date of the Claim. § 16.2 Claimant. An individual or entity having a direct contract with the Contractor or with u subcontractor of the Contractor to furnish labor, materials or equipment for use in the performance of the Construction Contract. Tice term Claimant also includes any individual or entity that has rightfully asserted a claim under an applicable mechanics's lien or similar statute against the real propeny upon which the Project is located. The intent of this Mond shall be to include without limitation in the terms 'labor, materials or equipment" that part of water, gas. power, light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service or rental equipment used in the Construction Contract, ". itectural and engineering services required for performance of rhe work of the Contractor and the Contractor's subcontractors, and all other items for which a mechanic's lien may be asserted in the jurisdiction cohere the labor, materials at equipment were furnished. § 16.3 Construction Contract. The agreement between the Owiter and Contractor identified an the cover page, including all Contract Documents and all changes made to the agreement and the Contract Documents. § 48.4 Owner 0efautL Failum of the Ovvner, which has not been remedied or waived, to pay the Contractor as required under the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other material terms of the Construction Contract. § 16.6 Contract CoCUtrterttS. All the documents that comprise the agreement between the Owner and Contractor. 17 If this Bond is issued I,,,, agreement between a Contractor and subcontractor, the term Contradar in this Bond shall be darned to b Subpontractor and the term Owner shall be deemed to be Contractor. 18 Modifications to this bond are as follows: (Space is provided beton for additional signatures ofadded parties, other then lhost apPepring on the cover page) CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: (Corporate Seal) Company: 4AIevi ZLV s vim Signature: Name and TA,W Signature- Name Name and Title: ,4ddress Page 4 of 4 (Coepo-le Seal) POWER OF ATTORNEY Principal -The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company Bend Numb#r.Njj27Lq Agency ganne:JM Wilson Corporation obligee: Agent Ceder Know All MosOhl by These PtnWtsta That The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company, pursuant to 'he- authority' granted by Article IV, Section 12 of the Code orRegulations and It Laws of The Ohio Casualty lrtsurarsce Company, do hereby .aminate, constitute and appoint: Alissa Russell; Stephanie Farrell; Steven C. Kuykendall orCARMEL, Indiana its True and lawful 418= (a) turd attognWiea}in.fad, to metre, executr, seal and diver for and on its behalf as surety, and as its est and deed any and all BONDS. IhIDEItTAK.. mm tendran " RECOGNIZANCES, excluding, however, any band(s) or undertakings) guaranteeing the payment of nates and itnereat thereon. �And Iht etteci€ttOn of Such bonds or vagdarttrkings in pursuance of these presents, t hall be as binding upon said Company, as Fu11y and amply, m all intents and y I testi duly execs W and acknowledged by the mgulariy elected officers or said Company at their adrninistraEive Vices in Keene, New h • u if s. Yitee tsulharitY gratite l heeeun &r suptaSedes any previous authority heretofore granted the above narrud anomaXies}ire-fact. n1 their own r In WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned officer of the said The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company has hereunto subscribed his name and affixed the Corporate Seal of said Company this 26th drry of September, 2016, 01 tea& �J�`eprar�r� � o_ 1,919 a n 0 aam�>taP� 'OM1 Ftp I)avtd M. Carey, Assistant Secretary STATE OF PENNSYLVANIA COUNTY OF MONTGOMERY On this 26th daY of September, 2016 before the Subscriber, a Notary Public or the State Of Pennsylvania, in and rot etre County of Montgomery, duly commissioned and qualified, carne David tr Carey, and he ac acknowledge of The Ohio Casualty lnsu mnce Cotnparry, tm me personally known to be the individual and orlicer described in. aro who executed the prtx�d.ing instrument, and he acknowledged the execution or the same. and being by me duly sworn deposes and says that he is the officer of the Company oforesoid. and that the seal aT"Wd to the Peeeding inamment is the Corporate Seal of said Company, arse the grid CoWrate Seal and his signature as officer were duly a�tted and srbseribed to the said instrument by� the authority and direction ofthe said Corwratioa IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and rdfixed my Official Seal at the City of King of Prussut, Stale of Pennsylvania, the day and year first a ve *rifle". ,g, PAS), �rrr� k E4 F(PCOMMONWEALTH OF PLNNS-TWA—M—A i v r Seas pF T�cf r'Sf�xv, lSyg7 Pt�1s "Qe t�serusrm � �s Notary Public in and far County of Montg.mery, Stste of Peansy[vania MY Commission expires Much 26, 2021 This POwerofanorney is granted underand by authority ofAnicle IV, Section 12 of the By -Laws orThe Ohio Casual Insurance Com y ty patsy, extracLa from wfiieh read= ARTICLE IV - Offxcn: Section 12 Power of Attorney. Any officer m other official orthe Corporation outhoriud for that purpose in writing by the Chairman or the President, and subject to such limitation as the Chairman or President may prescribe, shall appoint such auomeys-in-Lut, as may be mcrssary to act in behalf of the Corporation to make, execute, seol, acknowledge and deliver as surety any and all undertakings. bond, recogaizant:es and other surety obiigatio"s. Such auorrxys-in-fact, subject to the limitations set forth in their respective powers of attorney, shall have full pmAvr to bind the Corporation by their signature and execution or any such instruments am w attach thereto the seal of the Corporation. When so executed, such instruments shall be as binding as irsigtred by the President and attested to by the Seeeetary. Any low or authority planted to any representative Or attorey-in-fact under the provisions of this article may be revoked at any time by the Board, the Chairman, the President or by the officer or officers granting such power or atrtlroriry. This certificate and the above power of aftamey may be Signed by facsimile or mechanically reproduced signatures under and by authority of the rollau'ing vote of the board of directors of The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company effective an The 15th day of February, 2011: VOTED that the fmimile. of mechanically ":produced signature of any assistant secretary of the company, wherever a issued by the company to cannedion `Yilh surety bonds, shall be val id and bindingu the cont ffe upon o ce man copy of any Bawer of attorney purr parry with the same Force and effect as though manually affrcesl CERTIFICATE I ,the ttndenigsud Assistant secretary orm Ohio COlualtY and the above resolution oftheir Board Of Directors are true and correct copies saand are in f� _ force and efT'M Orrr this date fy that the rOTC90ing Power of attorney, the referenced By -Laws oriht Compan 1N WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my 6nd.e"d the seal ofthe Company this 14th clay of November 2J17 - py�Y ester, a 4o+,v°per o =19i8�� c ��1 a Barrer C_ LlM-Illy-.AismtSecretary Authorized By: Authorized Date; Smad 14mounts Premium: $ Contract Amount: $ Performance Amount: S Payment Amount: 5 Maintenance Amount: $ Co -Surety: Co -Surety Name: Co -Surety: % Special Commission: �crnci T�rrn Contras Date: Project Start Date: Completion Date: Maintenance Term: (9f regular commission leave blank) o.o`u vioo�xvo $ 3 a SNOIIVAON3a WOOa1Sa8 13A31 a3MOl a31N3O 1N3WNa3AOJ m311f1B - _ g till COD Q 4��B C7oe a I WIN DRUMM Wy O O Z m O Q N H m Q c W w a0C.,4 a0C4 -z 2 z 0Yc OYm W Z0 U0 + e W �� OOW J W 0 J00m le Lu Ix qui ym q� V I j m O V m O 5 lJ xr W I } J0x0 gY0 xQ=mm° 0 Jam a�� L JWWOm j0m o v F�to WoY a, .n r c m Q I N 0 W r a = a mJm�O FSO uj W U W ua I �� g a O aW DRAFTING SYMBOLS AND MATERIALS LEGEND o III fly s �� 118111 go [Nil 0 n on � r Ind e lu @ g5g w Leg��r g a` �e MT! ,� ofix P2911 I'. lige w a fir 1 $PI i � r �_ fi . SNOIIVAON311 WOONIS31113A31 N3MOl 2131N33 1N3WNN3AOD 21311f19 t 0 z y€ rte- ueo-mwx, jRB >3 00 3 4y ~ Z a a W O Qti ------ LU gyp' cr 0 4, a 0 m r - a i LU ` iz uj co xs 3 w rs � e 2 Yi xJ bE �wf-F 4 t C] w � r d LU G a TLX7�L- LU moi" a � W c=o o i a�'yomAm _ B: S S 1 Q w . , 5NOItpAON3a WOOZI1S3b 13A31 Z33MOl a31N30 1N3WNH3A0!E)H3ung #� 1 ! a 4 t it If® Q ��a file �yfig o��p1o�� Esq EI I "i R 11111 LU uj 3 �'�E W @@�J - fj o °'� � _ V � �y{ y y �(r ,[ yp ! y • p E n lJD i ❑IQi®3�A;! i 11 W H ! u u, I 9 ? ru 8 Z� �4 Z4 CL57 EE U M 8 C% 14.4 U t i uj LL fit oil 9 If d� Wui J LL c 3% lay ' b Yt YF DRi Fm �c ® tee. m' .aoew v.o ao a.-rm, _ _ O 5N0l11fAON3M WOOMIS3M -13A3-1 M3MOI M31N30 1N3HINM3AO9 Maline 4 � B � R p yah ui Ul Y 53; R$ aaa R i � a o .... Q N O 26 ET 0-. Q a •Z LU a LU LU j p G w z F w 1 � Jj�7 � 3 iiil I� Q n 24 8 2$ O; �§ ZL . .. o o ui LU j Ixo I � I SNOIIVAON311 MONISM 13A31 a3MO1 a31N33 1N3WN213AOD M31ins i $y LU yy yy _Zia LU [¢e g rR■ i� 1•Y � CO all p p ■ i� it a Y yi lilts W a � E E� if fill W;qs gli i�■ pq , 1 C Ill'' '� 3 5a� � Y s i, a y ISE 6d 141 111 2 W p66� yyG �d�i 8 7CEi1i1 i@ i1I�i��Yli tl s 0 z a N �jT9L J -. 1 �.. .. F 0 ` J L €puj 1 ! I a J CK gL M